Skip to content
Subjects

A-Level Physics

  • 1 Physical quantities and units
    1.1

    Physical quantities

    Syllabus
    1. understand that all physical quantities consist of a numerical magnitude and a unit
    2. make reasonable estimates of physical quantities included within the syllabus

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A physical quantity 物理量 has two parts: a number (its magnitude 大小) and a unit 单位. The number on its own tells you nothing. You must also say what is measured and in which unit.

    Example: "the length is 1.5" is not complete. "The length is 1.5 m" is a physical quantity.

    Making estimates

    You should be able to estimate 估算 the size of the physical quantities in this syllabus. Learn these rough values:

    • mass 质量 of an adult human: $\sim 70\ \text{kg}$
    • weight 重力 of an adult human: $\sim 700\ \text{N}$
    • height of an adult human: $\sim 1.7\ \text{m}$
    • mass of an apple: $\sim 0.1\ \text{kg}$ (so its weight is about $1\ \text{N}$)
    • speed of sound in air: $\sim 340\ \text{m s}^{-1}$
    • speed of light in a vacuum 真空: $3.0 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$
    • acceleration 加速度 of free fall 自由落体: $g \approx 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$

    A good estimate has the right order of magnitude 数量级 (the right power of ten). For a human, 70 kg is a good guess; 7 kg is not.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    physical quantity 物理量 wù lǐ liàng
    magnitude 大小 dà xiǎo
    unit 单位 dān wèi
    estimate 估算 gū suàn
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    free fall 自由落体 zì yóu luò tǐ
    order of magnitude 数量级 shù liàng jí
    SI units 国际单位制 guó jì dān wèi zhì
    base quantity 基本量 jī běn liàng
    1.2

    SI units 国际单位制

    Syllabus
    1. recall the following SI base quantities and their units: mass (kg), length (m), time (s), current (A), temperature (K)
    2. express derived units as products or quotients of the SI base units and use the derived units for quantities listed in this syllabus as appropriate
    3. use SI base units to check the homogeneity of physical equations
    4. recall and use the following prefixes and their symbols to indicate decimal submultiples or multiples of both base and derived units: pico (p), nano (n), micro (\mu), milli (m), centi (c), deci (d), kilo (k), mega (M), giga (G), tera (T)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Base units

    The SI system has seven base quantities 基本量; five of them are used in this topic. You must know these five and their units:

    • mass — kilogram, $\text{kg}$
    • length 长度 — metre, $\text{m}$
    • time — second, $\text{s}$
    • current 电流 — ampere 安培, $\text{A}$
    • temperature 温度 — kelvin 开尔文, $\text{K}$

    Every other unit in this syllabus is built from these five.

    Derived units

    A derived unit 导出单位 is made by multiplying or dividing base units. You should be able to write any quantity in this syllabus in base units.

    Build a derived unit from the equation that defines it:

    • speed 速率 = distance / time, so its unit is $\text{m s}^{-1}$
    • acceleration = change in velocity 速度 / time, so its unit is $\text{m s}^{-2}$
    • force = mass × acceleration, so its unit is $\text{kg m s}^{-2}$. The newton 牛顿 is $1\ \text{N} = 1\ \text{kg m s}^{-2}$.
    • work and energy 能量 = force × distance, so the unit is $\text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$. The joule 焦耳 is $1\ \text{J} = 1\ \text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$.
    • power 功率 = energy / time, so the unit is $\text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-3}$. The watt 瓦特 is $1\ \text{W} = 1\ \text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-3}$.
    • pressure 压强 and stress 应力 = force / area, so the unit is $\text{kg m}^{-1}\ \text{s}^{-2}$. The pascal 帕斯卡 is $1\ \text{Pa} = 1\ \text{kg m}^{-1}\ \text{s}^{-2}$.

    When a question asks for the SI base units of a quantity, replace each named unit with its base units, then simplify. Example: the SI base units of the watt are $\text{kg m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-3}$.

    Checking that the units match

    An equation is homogeneous 量纲一致 when both sides have the same base units. In plain words: the units on both sides match.

    Write each side in base units and compare. Take the equation $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$:

    • left side: $(\text{m s}^{-1})^{2} = \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$
    • right side, first term: $(\text{m s}^{-1})^{2} = \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$
    • right side, second term: $\text{m s}^{-2} \cdot \text{m} = \text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$

    Both sides give $\text{m}^{2}\ \text{s}^{-2}$, so the units match.

    Be careful: matching units do not prove the whole equation is correct. It could still have a wrong number, or a missing factor of 2. But if the units do not match, the equation is wrong for sure.

    Prefixes

    A prefix 词头 is a letter put in front of a unit to make it bigger or smaller by powers of ten. You must know these:

    The SI prefixes climb in steps of a thousand, from pico up to giga
    The SI prefixes climb in steps of a thousand, from pico to giga
    Prefix Symbol Factor
    tera T $10^{12}$
    giga G $10^{9}$
    mega M $10^{6}$
    kilo k $10^{3}$
    deci d $10^{-1}$
    centi c $10^{-2}$
    milli m $10^{-3}$
    micro $\mu$ $10^{-6}$
    nano n $10^{-9}$
    pico p $10^{-12}$

    To change a prefixed unit into base units, replace the prefix with its factor, then simplify. Example: change $0.25\ \text{kN mm}^{-2}$ into $\text{N m}^{-2}$:

    $$0.25\ \text{kN mm}^{-2} = 0.25 \times \frac{10^{3}\ \text{N}}{(10^{-3}\ \text{m})^{2}} = 0.25 \times \frac{10^{3}}{10^{-6}}\ \text{N m}^{-2} = 2.5 \times 10^{8}\ \text{N m}^{-2}.$$

    Take special care with squared units like $\text{mm}^{2}$: you must square the factor too.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    length 长度 cháng dù
    current 电流 diàn liú
    ampere 安培 ān péi
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    kelvin 开尔文 kāi ěr wén
    derived unit 导出单位 dǎo chū dān wèi
    speed 速率 sù lǜ
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    force
    newton 牛顿 niú dùn
    work gōng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    joule 焦耳 jiāo ěr
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    watt 瓦特 wǎ tè
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    stress 应力 yīng lì
    pascal 帕斯卡 pà sī kǎ
    homogeneous 量纲一致 liàng gāng yí zhì
    prefix 词头 cí tóu
    1.3

    Errors and uncertainties

    Syllabus
    1. understand and explain the effects of systematic errors (including zero errors) and random errors in measurements
    2. understand the distinction between precision and accuracy
    3. assess the uncertainty in a derived quantity by simple addition of absolute or percentage uncertainties

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A vernier caliper measuring an object
    A vernier caliper measures length precisely, with a small uncertainty.

    Every measurement 测量 has some uncertainty 不确定度 — we are never fully sure of the value. A good experimenter knows where the uncertainty comes from, makes a fair estimate of it, and carries it through to the final answer.

    A labelled photograph of a real micrometer screw gauge: the anvil and spindle close onto the object, the C-shaped frame holds them, the sleeve carries the main scale, the thimble carries the thimble scale, and the ratchet closes it gently
    The main parts of a real micrometer screw gauge, which measures to the nearest 0.01 mm
    Two micrometer readings. Panel a is a zero reading: the thimble edge is at 0 mm and the thimble 0 lines up with the datum line, so it reads 0.00 mm. Panel b is a measurement: the thimble edge has passed 5.5 mm on the main scale and the thimble 28 lines up with the datum line, giving 5.5 + 0.28 = 5.78 mm
    Reading a micrometer: add the main scale reading to the thimble reading
    A close-up photograph of a real micrometer scale: the sleeve's main scale on the left meets the rotating thimble scale on the right at the datum line
    Reading a real micrometer: read the mm and half-mm on the sleeve, then add the thimble scale
    A metal vernier caliper with its jaws and a main centimetre scale, and a shorter sliding vernier scale that gives the extra digit of the reading
    Vernier calipers measure to the nearest 0.1 mm — the sliding scale gives the extra digit
    How to read a vernier caliper. The main scale gives the whole millimetres at the vernier zero (here 15 mm); the one vernier line that lines up with a main line gives the tenths (line 4, so 0.4 mm); the reading is 15.4 mm
    Reading a vernier caliper: whole millimetres from the main scale, plus the tenths from the vernier line that lines up

    Systematic and random errors

    A systematic error 系统误差 changes every reading by the same amount, in the same direction. You cannot find it by repeating the measurement. Common causes:

    • a zero error 零点误差 (the scale does not read zero when the true value is zero)
    • a calibration 校准 error (the scale itself is wrong)
    • parallax 视差 (your eye is always to one side of the scale)
    An analogue ammeter with a 0 to 5 A scale. With no current flowing the needle should rest on zero, but it rests just below the zero mark. A dashed line shows the true zero position and a small arrow marks the gap, labelled zero error
    An ammeter with a zero error: the needle reads below zero before any current flows
    A pointer raised above a ruler, viewed by three eyes. The eye straight above reads the true value; an eye too far left reads too low and an eye too far right reads too high, because each sight line crosses the scale at a different mark
    Parallax error: different viewing angles give different scale readings

    A systematic error makes the accuracy 准确度 worse, but it does not change the precision 精密度.

    A random error 随机误差 makes readings jump above and below the true value, with no pattern. Causes include how carefully you read the scale, changing conditions, and the smallest step the instrument 仪器 can show. If you repeat the measurement many times and take the mean 平均值 (the average), random errors partly cancel out.

    A random error makes the precision worse. But with enough repeats, the mean can still be accurate.

    Precision and accuracy

    Precision is how close repeated readings are to each other. Precise readings are grouped very close together.

    Accuracy is how close a reading (or the mean of several readings) is to the true value.

    Two distribution curves, both centred on the true value T. The top curve is narrow and tall, labelled precise and accurate; the bottom curve is wide and low, labelled imprecise but accurate. Both peaks sit on T, so precision is about how narrow the curve is
    Precision: how narrow the distribution is around the true value T

    A set of readings can be:

    • precise and accurate — close together and near the true value
    • precise but not accurate — close together, but away from the true value (a systematic error)
    • accurate but not precise — spread out, but the mean is near the true value
    • neither — spread out and away from the true value
    Two distribution curves whose peaks are both offset from the true value T. The top curve is narrow but its peak is to the right of T, labelled precise but not accurate; the bottom curve is wide and its peak is also to the right of T, labelled imprecise and not accurate. A double-headed arrow marks the offset from T in each
    Accuracy: whether the peak of the distribution is centred on the true value T

    When a question gives a table of repeated readings, look at the spread (precision) and the mean (accuracy) separately.

    Uncertainty in a derived quantity

    A measurement is often written as $x \pm \Delta x$. Here $\Delta x$ is the absolute uncertainty 绝对不确定度. The percentage uncertainty 百分比不确定度 is

    $$\text{percentage uncertainty in } x = \frac{\Delta x}{|x|} \times 100\%.$$

    A derived quantity 导出量 is one you calculate from measured values. Its uncertainty is found by simple rules:

    • Adding or subtracting — add the absolute uncertainties. If $y = a + b$ or $y = a - b$, then $\Delta y = \Delta a + \Delta b$.
    • Multiplying or dividing — add the percentage uncertainties. If $y = \dfrac{a \cdot b}{c}$, then
      $$\frac{\Delta y}{|y|} = \frac{\Delta a}{|a|} + \frac{\Delta b}{|b|} + \frac{\Delta c}{|c|}.$$
    • Powers — multiply the percentage uncertainty by the power. If $y = a^{n}$, then $\dfrac{\Delta y}{|y|} = |n| \cdot \dfrac{\Delta a}{|a|}$.

    Worked example. A ball's diameter 直径 is measured as $d = (5.26 \pm 0.02)\ \text{cm}$. The volume 体积 of a sphere is $V = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi r^{3} = \tfrac{4}{3}\pi (d/2)^{3}$, so $V \propto d^{3}$ ($V$ depends on $d$ cubed).

    The percentage uncertainty in $d$ is

    $$\frac{0.02}{5.26} \times 100\% \approx 0.38\%.$$

    Because $V \propto d^{3}$, the percentage uncertainty in $V$ is three times this, about $1.14\%$. The volume is $\tfrac{4}{3}\pi(2.63)^{3} \approx 76.2\ \text{cm}^{3}$. So the absolute uncertainty is $0.0114 \times 76.2 \approx 0.87\ \text{cm}^{3}$. The final answer is $V = (76.2 \pm 0.9)\ \text{cm}^{3}$.

    Significant figures

    When you write a calculated quantity, give it the same number of significant figures 有效数字 as the least precise measurement you used — usually two or three in this syllabus. Too many significant figures makes the answer look more exact than it really is. Too few loses useful information.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    measurement 测量 cè liáng
    uncertainty 不确定度 bù què dìng dù
    systematic error 系统误差 xì tǒng wù chā
    zero error 零点误差 líng diǎn wù chā
    calibration 校准 jiào zhǔn
    parallax 视差 shì chà
    accuracy 准确度 zhǔn què dù
    precision 精密度 jīng mì dù
    random error 随机误差 suí jī wù chā
    instrument 仪器 yí qì
    mean 平均值 píng jūn zhí
    absolute uncertainty 绝对不确定度 jué duì bù què dìng dù
    percentage uncertainty 百分比不确定度 bǎi fēn bǐ bù què dìng dù
    derived quantity 导出量 dǎo chū liàng
    diameter 直径 zhí jìng
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    significant figures 有效数字 yǒu xiào shù zì
    1.4

    Scalars and vectors

    Syllabus
    1. understand the difference between scalar and vector quantities and give examples of scalar and vector quantities included in the syllabus
    2. add and subtract coplanar vectors
    3. represent a vector as two perpendicular components

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Resolving a force into components

    A scalar 标量 has size only. A vector 矢量 has both size and direction.

    Examples from the syllabus:

    • scalars: mass, time, temperature, energy, work, power, distance, speed, pressure, density 密度, electric charge 电荷
    • vectors: displacement 位移, velocity, acceleration, force (including weight), momentum 动量

    Quick test: if it makes sense to ask "in which direction?", the quantity is a vector. You cannot ask "in which direction is the temperature?", so temperature is a scalar. You can ask "in which direction is the velocity?", so velocity is a vector.

    Adding and subtracting vectors

    A vector is drawn as an arrow: the direction of the arrow gives the direction of the quantity, and the length of the arrow (drawn to scale) gives the magnitude.

    Two velocity vectors drawn as arrows to scale, with a north-south compass reference and a scale key of 1 unit to 5 metres per second. Arrow a points due east and is three units long for 15 metres per second; arrow b points due south and is two units long for 10 metres per second
    Vectors represented as arrows drawn to scale

    To add two coplanar 共面 vectors (vectors in the same flat plane), draw them tip to tail. The resultant 合矢量 goes from the tail of the first arrow to the tip of the second.

    To find $\vec{X} - \vec{Y}$, add the reverse of $\vec{Y}$: $\vec{X} + (-\vec{Y})$. The reverse of $\vec{Y}$ has the same size as $\vec{Y}$ but points the opposite way.

    Adding and subtracting parallel vectors, drawn tip to tail. Row a: 20 N up plus 30 N up, stacked tip to tail, gives a 50 N resultant pointing up. Row b: 20 N up minus 30 N down, so the 30 N is drawn pointing down tip to tail, giving a 10 N resultant pointing down
    Adding and subtracting parallel vectors

    If the two vectors are at right angles (90°), the size of the resultant is

    $$|\vec{R}| = \sqrt{X^{2} + Y^{2}},$$

    and its direction comes from $\tan\theta = Y / X$.

    Worked example. A swimmer heads north at $1.2\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ across a river that flows east at $0.5\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the size and direction of the resultant velocity.

    The two velocities are perpendicular, so

    $$|\vec{R}| = \sqrt{1.2^{2} + 0.5^{2}} = \sqrt{1.69} = 1.3\ \text{m s}^{-1},$$

    at an angle $\tan\theta = 0.5/1.2$, giving $\theta \approx 23°$ east of north.

    The swimmer example as a vector triangle: a 1.2 m/s north arrow and a 0.5 m/s east arrow drawn tip to tail, with the resultant from start to finish at angle theta east of north, of magnitude the square root of 1.2 squared plus 0.5 squared
    Two perpendicular vectors add to a resultant of size $\sqrt{X^2+Y^2}$ at angle $\theta$

    If two vectors have the same size $F$ with an angle $2\alpha$ between them, the resultant has size $2F\cos\alpha$ and lies along the line that cuts the angle in half.

    Splitting a vector into perpendicular parts

    Any vector can be split into two perpendicular 垂直 (at right angles) components 分量. Usually these are horizontal 水平 and vertical 竖直, or along and across a surface. For a vector $\vec{v}$ at angle $\theta$ to the horizontal:

    $$v_{\text{H}} = v\cos\theta, \qquad v_{\text{V}} = v\sin\theta.$$
    A force F at angle theta to the horizontal, resolved into perpendicular components. A dashed horizontal arrow is the horizontal component F_H = F cos theta and a dashed vertical arrow is the vertical component F_V = F sin theta; together with F they form a right-angled triangle
    Resolving a vector into horizontal and vertical components

    Choose the directions that make the problem easiest. On a slope (an inclined plane 斜面), split the weight into one part along the slope and one part at right angles to it:

    $$W_{\parallel} = W\sin\theta, \qquad W_{\perp} = W\cos\theta,$$

    where $\theta$ is the angle of the slope to the horizontal.

    You split a vector into components whenever you need to know how much of it acts in one direction. For example: the part of a force that acts along a slope, or the horizontal and vertical parts of a ball's velocity after it is thrown.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    density 密度 mì dù
    electric charge 电荷 diàn hè
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    coplanar 共面 gòng miàn
    resultant 合矢量 hé shǐ liàng
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    vertical 竖直 shù zhí
    inclined plane 斜面 xié miàn
    Exercise sheet
    1.4

    Exam tips

    • Give every answer a unit, and check homogeneity — both sides of an equation must have the same base units.
    • Distinguish random error (reduce by repeating and averaging) from systematic error (a zero or calibration error that repeats do not remove).
    • Combine uncertainties: add absolute uncertainties when adding/subtracting, add percentage uncertainties when multiplying/dividing (and multiply the % by any power).
    • Distinguish precision (small spread) from accuracy (close to the true value).
    • Resolve a vector into perpendicular components ($F\cos\theta$, $F\sin\theta$); add vectors tip-to-tail or by components.
  • 2 Kinematics
    2.1

    Key definitions

    Syllabus
    1. define and use distance, displacement, speed, velocity and acceleration
    2. use graphical methods to represent distance, displacement, speed, velocity and acceleration
    3. determine displacement from the area under a velocity–time graph
    4. determine velocity using the gradient of a displacement–time graph
    5. determine acceleration using the gradient of a velocity–time graph
    6. derive, from the definitions of velocity and acceleration, equations that represent uniformly accelerated motion in a straight line
    7. solve problems using equations that represent uniformly accelerated motion in a straight line, including the motion of bodies falling in a uniform gravitational field without air resistance
    8. describe an experiment to determine the acceleration of free fall using a falling object
    9. describe and explain motion due to a uniform velocity in one direction and a uniform acceleration in a perpendicular direction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Dropped vs thrown: falling together
    A car speedometer
    A speedometer shows speed: the distance travelled per unit time.

    These five quantities come up in almost every kinematics 运动学 question. Learn the exact words — the examiner gives marks for precise wording.

    • distance 距离 — the total length of the path travelled. A scalar 标量.
    • displacement 位移 — the straight-line distance from the start to the end, with a direction. A vector 矢量.
    • speed 速率 — the rate of change of distance with time. A scalar.
    • velocity 速度 — the rate of change of displacement with time. A vector.
    • acceleration 加速度 — the rate of change of velocity with time. A vector.

    The unit of speed and velocity is $\text{m s}^{-1}$; the unit of acceleration is $\text{m s}^{-2}$.

    A common mistake: deceleration 减速度 just means acceleration in the opposite direction to the velocity. It is not a separate quantity.

    Explore

    The velocity–time graph

    v = u + at

    On a speed–time graph the gradient is the acceleration and the area underneath is the distance travelled.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    kinematics 运动学 yùn dòng xué
    distance 距离 jù lí
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    speed 速率 sù lǜ
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    deceleration 减速度 jiǎn sù dù
    Exercise sheet
    2.1

    Motion graphs

    A high-speed TGV train on a viaduct
    A high-speed train: its motion can be shown on a distance-time graph.

    Many marks come from reading or drawing motion graphs. Two graphs matter.

    Displacement–time graph

    The gradient 斜率 (steepness) of a displacement–time graph at a point gives the velocity at that moment.

    • flat line → the object is at rest.
    • straight sloping line → constant velocity (gradient = velocity).
    • curved line → changing velocity. Draw a tangent 切线 at the point and find its gradient.
    A displacement–time graph of a car on a test track: the curve starts shallow, steepens as the car speeds up, then levels off; a tangent drawn at one point shows the instantaneous velocity there
    Displacement–time graph of a car on a test track

    Velocity–time graph

    The gradient of a velocity–time graph gives the acceleration at that moment.

    The area between the line and the time axis gives the displacement in that time.

    • flat line → constant velocity (zero acceleration).
    • straight sloping line → uniform acceleration 匀加速 (constant acceleration).
    • curved line → changing acceleration.
    • area above the time axis is positive displacement; area below is negative (the object moved backwards).
    Velocity–time graph showing a triangular shape: velocity rises to a peak then falls back to zero; the gradient of each line is the acceleration and the shaded area under the line is the total displacement
    Velocity–time graph — gradient gives acceleration, area gives displacement
    Acceleration–time graph paired with the velocity–time graph above: a constant positive acceleration, then a step down to a constant negative acceleration
    Acceleration–time graph derived from the same motion

    To find the displacement, split the area into triangles and rectangles, or count grid squares. Area of a triangle is $\tfrac{1}{2} \times \text{base} \times \text{height}$; area of a rectangle is $\text{base} \times \text{height}$.

    Explore

    Reading a velocity–time graph

    Change the start velocity u and the acceleration a. The gradient of the line is the acceleration; the area under it is the displacement.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gradient 斜率 xié lǜ
    tangent 切线 qiè xiàn
    uniform acceleration 匀加速 yún jiā sù
    2.1

    The four SUVAT equations

    For motion in a straight line with uniform acceleration, we use five symbols: starting velocity $u$, final velocity $v$, acceleration $a$, displacement $s$, and time $t$. Four equations link them:

    $$v = u + at$$
    $$s = ut + \tfrac{1}{2} a t^{2}$$
    $$s = \tfrac{1}{2}(u + v)t$$
    $$v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$$

    Each equation uses four of the five symbols. To pick the right one: write down what you know and what you want, then choose the equation with exactly those four.

    Worked example. A car accelerates uniformly from $8\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ to $20\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ over a distance of $56\ \text{m}$. Find its acceleration.

    We know $u$, $v$ and $s$ and want $a$, so use $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$:

    $$20^{2} = 8^{2} + 2a(56) \quad\Rightarrow\quad 336 = 112\,a \quad\Rightarrow\quad a = 3.0\ \text{m s}^{-2}.$$

    Where the SUVAT equations come from

    You should be able to get these from the definitions of velocity and acceleration:

    • $v = u + at$ comes from $a = (v - u)/t$, the gradient of the line.
    • $s = \tfrac{1}{2}(u + v) t$ is the area under the line — a trapezium 梯形 with parallel sides $u$ and $v$ and width $t$.
    • $s = ut + \tfrac{1}{2}at^{2}$ comes from putting $v = u + at$ into the area.
    • $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$ comes from removing $t$ from the first two.
    Displacement–time parabola for uniform acceleration: the curve rises from the origin and steepens, with a tangent drawn at one point labelled slope equals v
    Displacement–time graph for uniform acceleration — the slope at any point equals the instantaneous velocity

    If a question asks "which equation can be found using only the gradient of a velocity–time graph?", the answer is $v = u + at$ (the gradient is the acceleration).

    Choosing a positive direction

    Pick a positive direction at the start and keep it. Anything pointing the other way gets a minus sign. For a ball thrown straight up, if "up" is positive: $u$ is positive, $a = -g$ (gravity 重力 pulls down), and at the highest point the displacement is positive but the velocity is zero.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    trapezium 梯形 tī xíng
    gravity 重力 zhòng lì
    2.1

    Free fall under gravity

    When air resistance 空气阻力 can be ignored, an object in free fall 自由落体 has a constant acceleration $g \approx 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ downwards. This is the same for every mass.

    For a ball dropped from rest and falling a distance $h$:

    $$h = \tfrac{1}{2}gt^{2}, \qquad v = gt, \qquad v^{2} = 2gh.$$

    For a ball thrown straight up with speed $u$:

    • greatest height: put $v = 0$ in $v^{2} = u^{2} - 2gh$, giving $h = u^{2}/(2g)$.
    • time to reach the top: put $v = 0$ in $v = u - gt$, giving $t = u/g$.
    • total time to fall back to the start height: $2u/g$ (the motion is symmetric 对称).

    Worked example. A ball is thrown straight up at $20\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the greatest height it reaches (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    At the highest point $v = 0$, so from $h = u^{2}/(2g)$:

    $$h = \frac{20^{2}}{2 \times 9.81} = \frac{400}{19.62} \approx 20.4\ \text{m}.$$

    Experiment to find $g$

    A common method: drop an object from rest, then measure the distance $h$ it falls and the time $t$ it takes. Then

    $$g = \frac{2h}{t^{2}}.$$

    Repeat for several heights and plot $h$ against $t^{2}$. The gradient of the best straight line is $g/2$, so $g$ is twice the gradient. Repeating reduces random error 随机误差. An electronic timer — using light gates 光电门, or a switch the ball hits — removes reaction-time 反应时间 error.

    Experimental set-up to measure g: a release switch cuts the current to an electromagnet so a steel ball drops and starts an electronic timer; the ball falls a measured height h and strikes a trapdoor switch that stops the timer
    Experimental set-up for measuring the acceleration due to free fall
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    air resistance 空气阻力 kōng qì zǔ lì
    free fall 自由落体 zì yóu luò tǐ
    symmetric 对称 duì chèn
    random error 随机误差 suí jī wù chā
    light gate 光电门 guāng diàn mén
    reaction-time 反应时间 fǎn yìng shí jiān
    2.1

    Motion in two directions

    Water jets leave one sprinkler nozzle at the same speed but different angles (, , ); each traces a parabola, and the  jet reaches the greatest range
    Water jets from a sprinkler trace parabola paths — a real example of projectile motion

    When an object moves at constant velocity in one direction (say horizontal 水平) and speeds up in a direction at right angles to it (say vertical 竖直, under gravity), the two motions do not affect each other. Treat each direction on its own, with its own SUVAT equation.

    Horizontal throw

    An object thrown horizontally with speed $u_{\text{H}}$ from height $h$, with air resistance ignored:

    • horizontal: constant velocity $u_{\text{H}}$. After time $t$, the horizontal distance is $x = u_{\text{H}} t$.
    • vertical: starts from rest and speeds up downwards at $g$. After time $t$, it has fallen $y = \tfrac{1}{2} g t^{2}$ and has vertical velocity $v_{\text{V}} = g t$.

    The time to reach the ground depends only on the height $h$, not on $u_{\text{H}}$. Solve $h = \tfrac{1}{2} g t^{2}$ for $t$; then the horizontal range 射程 is $u_{\text{H}} t$.

    Worked example. A ball is thrown horizontally at $15\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ from the top of a cliff $20\ \text{m}$ high. Find the time it takes to land and how far from the base it lands (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    Vertical motion gives the time: from $h = \tfrac{1}{2}g t^{2}$,

    $$t = \sqrt{\frac{2h}{g}} = \sqrt{\frac{2 \times 20}{9.81}} \approx 2.0\ \text{s}.$$

    Horizontal motion then gives the range: $x = u_{\text{H}} t = 15 \times 2.0 \approx 30\ \text{m}.$

    The horizontal-velocity graph is a flat line at $u_{\text{H}}$. The vertical-velocity graph is a straight line from the origin with gradient $g$.

    Projectile at an angle

    A projectile 抛体 thrown at speed $u$ at angle $\theta$ above the horizontal:

    Diagram of a projectile launched at angle  above the horizontal: parabolic path from the origin, the initial velocity  resolved into horizontal component  and vertical component , with  and  axes labelled
    Projectile launched at angle $\theta$ — horizontal and vertical motions are independent
    • horizontal component 分量 of the starting velocity: $u_{\text{H}} = u \cos\theta$ (stays constant during the flight).
    • vertical component of the starting velocity: $u_{\text{V}} = u \sin\theta$ (gets smaller, becomes zero at the top, then grows downwards).

    At the highest point, $v_{\text{V}} = 0$, but $v_{\text{H}}$ is still $u\cos\theta$. The time to the top is $t_{\text{up}} = u\sin\theta / g$; the total flight time (back to the start height) is $2t_{\text{up}}$.

    Projectile launched at angle  from level ground: a parabolic path showing the range  from launch to landing point and the maximum height  at the midpoint
    Range $R$ of a projectile launched from and landing on level ground

    Bouncing ball

    When a ball bounces, its velocity–time graph is a set of straight sloping lines (constant $g$) with a sudden jump at each bounce (the velocity flips direction, and gets smaller if some energy 能量 is lost). Add up the times and the distances across the bounces.

    Explore

    Launch a projectile

    Fire the ball, then change the angle and speed. The horizontal motion is steady while gravity pulls it down — together they trace a parabola. Find the angle for the longest range, and try the Moon.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    vertical 竖直 shù zhí
    range 射程 shè chéng
    projectile 抛体 pāo tǐ
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    2.1

    Two objects meeting

    When two objects move along the same line in different ways, write a displacement equation for each. Use the same start time and the same positive direction. Then set the two displacements equal (or set their difference to a given gap).

    For a goods train at constant velocity $u_{\text{G}}$ and an express train starting from rest with acceleration $a$, both passing the same point at $t = 0$:

    $$s_{\text{G}} = u_{\text{G}} t, \qquad s_{\text{E}} = \tfrac{1}{2} a t^{2}.$$

    They are level again when $s_{\text{G}} = s_{\text{E}}$, giving $t = 2 u_{\text{G}} / a$.

    Two s–t graphs meet where the objects are level at the same time
    Meet where the displacement–time graphs cross (same s at same t)
    2.1

    Tips for solving problems

    1. Draw a diagram and mark the positive direction.
    2. List the SUVAT symbols with their known and unknown values, including signs.
    3. Choose the SUVAT equation with exactly the four symbols you have, plus the one you want.
    4. For projectile motion, split into horizontal and vertical SUVAT problems, linked only by the time $t$.
    5. Always check the units of your answer, and that its size is sensible.
    2.1

    Exam tips

    • Use the SUVAT equations only for constant acceleration; list $s, u, v, a, t$ and pick the equation missing your unknown.
    • Choose one direction as positive and keep signs consistent (usually $g = -9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).
    • On a velocity-time graph, gradient $=$ acceleration and area $=$ displacement.
    • For projectiles, treat horizontal (constant velocity) and vertical ($a = g$) motion separately, linked by the same time.
  • 3 Dynamics
    3.1

    Mass, momentum and force

    Syllabus
    1. understand that mass is the property of an object that resists change in motion
    2. recall $F = ma$ and solve problems using it, understanding that acceleration and resultant force are always in the same direction
    3. define and use linear momentum as the product of mass and velocity
    4. define and use force as rate of change of momentum
    5. state and apply each of Newton’s laws of motion
    6. describe and use the concept of weight as the effect of a gravitational field on a mass and recall that the weight of an object is equal to the product of its mass and the acceleration of free fall

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Mass

    Mass 质量 tells you how hard it is to change an object's motion. The larger the mass, the larger the force needed to give it a certain acceleration 加速度. Mass is measured in kilograms ($\text{kg}$) and is a scalar 标量.

    Momentum

    Linear momentum 动量 is the product of mass and velocity:

    $$p = mv.$$

    Momentum is a vector 矢量 — it points the same way as the velocity 速度. Its unit is $\text{kg m s}^{-1}$, which is the same as $\text{N s}$.

    Force as the rate of change of momentum

    Newton's second law, in its general form: the resultant force 合力 on an object equals the rate of change of its momentum.

    Impulse is the area under a force–time graph, and equals the change in momentum
    Impulse is the area under a force-time graph, equal to the change in momentum
    $$F = \frac{\Delta p}{\Delta t}.$$

    When the mass is constant this becomes $F = ma$, because $\Delta p = m\,\Delta v$ and $\Delta v / \Delta t = a$. Cambridge questions often want you to use $F = \Delta p / \Delta t$ directly for a collision 碰撞 or an impulse 冲量: the average force equals the change in momentum divided by the contact time.

    A ball hits a wall with momentum $p_{1}$ and bounces back with momentum $p_{2}$ in the opposite direction. The change in momentum is $\Delta p = p_{2} - p_{1}$ (give each direction the correct sign). The average force is $\Delta p / \Delta t$, where $\Delta t$ is the contact time.

    Worked example. A $0.20\ \text{kg}$ ball hits a wall at $8.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and bounces straight back at $6.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. The contact lasts $0.050\ \text{s}$. Find the average force on the ball.

    Take the rebound direction as positive, so $u = -8.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ and $v = +6.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$:

    $$\Delta p = m(v - u) = 0.20 \times \big(6.0 - (-8.0)\big) = 2.8\ \text{kg m s}^{-1},$$
    $$F = \frac{\Delta p}{\Delta t} = \frac{2.8}{0.050} = 56\ \text{N}.$$

    When you know the momentum but not the speed, the change in kinetic energy 动能 is

    $$\Delta E_{\text{k}} = \frac{p_{2}^{2} - p_{1}^{2}}{2m}.$$

    This comes from $E_{\text{k}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2} = p^{2} / (2m)$.

    Explore

    Free-body diagram (F = ma)

    The resultant of the forces, divided by the mass, gives the acceleration.

    Explore

    Newton's second law

    F = ma (resultant)

    The resultant force sets the acceleration; balanced forces ⇒ none.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    force
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    linear momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    resultant force 合力 hé lì
    collision 碰撞 pèng zhuàng
    impulse 冲量 chōng liàng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    3.1

    Newton's three laws of motion

    A space shuttle launching
    A rocket pushes gas down; by Newton's third law the gas pushes the rocket up.

    First law

    An object stays at rest, or keeps moving at constant velocity in a straight line, unless a resultant external force 外力 acts on it. In short: zero resultant force means zero acceleration.

    Second law

    The resultant force on an object equals its rate of change of momentum, and acts in the same direction as that change. In SI units,

    $$F = \frac{\Delta p}{\Delta t} = ma \quad\text{(for constant mass)}.$$

    Acceleration and resultant force always point the same way.

    Free-body diagram of a box on a floor with four force arrows: P pulling at 20 degrees above horizontal to the left, R upward, W downward, and F friction to the right
    Free-body diagram showing all forces on a block being pulled at an angle
    A book resting on a table with weight arrow pointing down and normal contact force R arrow pointing up, the two arrows equal in length to show equilibrium
    Weight and normal contact force on a book resting on a table

    Third law

    When body A pushes on body B, body B pushes back on body A with an equal and opposite force. The two forces:

    • act on different objects,
    • are of the same type (both gravitational, both contact, both electrostatic 静电, and so on),
    • have the same size and opposite direction.

    A common trap: the weight 重力 of a block on a table and the normal contact force 支持力 from the table are not a third-law pair (they act on the same object and are different types). The third-law partner of the block's weight is the pull the block makes on the Earth. The third-law partner of the table's contact force is the push the block makes on the table.

    For a rocket: the thrust 推力 on the rocket and the force on the gases are a third-law pair (the engine pushes the gas down, the gas pushes the engine up). Weight and air resistance are not part of this pair.

    A book on a table with the contact-point arrows: R acting upward on the book (the table pushing the book up) and R-prime acting downward on the table (the book pushing the table down) — equal and opposite forces on different objects
    Newton's third-law pair: R on the book (up) and R′ on the table (down)
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    external force 外力 wài lì
    electrostatic 静电 jìng diàn
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    normal contact force 支持力 zhī chí lì
    thrust 推力 tuī lì
    3.1

    Weight

    Weight is the force on an object from a gravitational field 重力场. Near the Earth's surface,

    $$W = mg,$$

    where $g \approx 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$ is the acceleration of free fall. Weight is a vector that points towards the centre of the Earth. Do not mix it up with mass: mass is the same everywhere, but weight changes with place.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gravitational field 重力场 zhòng lì chǎng
    3.2

    Non-uniform motion: friction, drag and terminal velocity

    Syllabus
    1. show a qualitative understanding of frictional forces and viscous/drag forces including air resistance (no treatment of the coefficients of friction and viscosity is required, and a simple model of drag force increasing as speed increases is sufficient)
    2. describe and explain qualitatively the motion of objects in a uniform gravitational field with air resistance
    3. understand that objects moving against a resistive force may reach a terminal (constant) velocity

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Friction and drag forces

    A friction 摩擦力 force between two solid surfaces acts along the surface and opposes the sliding. A viscous 黏性 or drag 阻力 force is the resistive force from a fluid 流体 (a liquid or gas) on an object moving through it; air resistance is the case for air. You do not need to use any coefficient 系数 of friction or viscosity.

    A simple model: the drag gets bigger as the speed gets bigger. At zero speed, the drag is zero.

    A book being pulled along a table with four force arrows: normal contact force up, weight down, pulling force P to the right, frictional force F to the left
    Free-body diagram of a book being pulled on a table

    An object falling through air

    For an object dropped from rest and falling through air:

    1. At first, only weight acts, so the object speeds up downwards at $g$.
    2. As the speed grows, the upward drag grows. The resultant force gets smaller, so the acceleration gets smaller.
    3. In the end, the drag equals the weight. The resultant force is zero, the acceleration is zero, and the speed stays constant — the terminal velocity 收尾速度.

    On a velocity–time graph, the line starts straight with gradient $g$, then bends and flattens at the terminal velocity. This shape (fast start, then slowing acceleration, then constant speed) is how "falling with air resistance" differs from "free fall in a vacuum".

    Velocity-time graph showing speed rising with initial gradient g, then curving and levelling off at the terminal velocity, with a dashed tangent at the origin and a dashed asymptote
    Velocity–time graph for an object falling through air
    An object falling through a fluid with drag (viscous force) plus upthrust acting upward and weight acting downward, and a velocity arrow pointing down
    Forces on a falling object in a fluid
    Skydivers in free fall, arms and legs spread wide, high above the ground at sunset
    Why the spread-eagle pose? Spreading out gives the largest area, so the most drag. The bigger the drag, the sooner drag balances weight — and the lower the steady terminal velocity they fall at

    Energy during a terminal-velocity fall

    At terminal velocity, a parachutist 跳伞者 has constant kinetic energy. But the gravitational potential energy 重力势能 keeps falling as they go down. Where does it go? Almost all of it turns into thermal energy 热能 of the air around them. It does not become kinetic energy of the parachutist — that stays constant.

    Cyclist or car at constant speed

    A vehicle at constant speed on a flat road has zero resultant force. The forward driving force is equal and opposite to the total resistive force (friction, air resistance, and rolling resistance). At higher speed the drag is larger, so the driving force must be larger too — and so the power 功率 must be larger.

    Explore

    Stopping a car

    Friction is what brakes a car. Set a speed and brake — the car keeps moving while the driver reacts, then friction slows it. Double the speed and watch the braking distance quadruple.

    Explore

    Reach terminal velocity

    Jump and watch the air-resistance arrow grow until it balances the weight — then the speed is constant. Open the parachute and the much bigger drag drops the diver to a slow, safe terminal velocity.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    viscous 黏性 nián xìng
    drag 阻力 zǔ lì
    fluid 流体 liú tǐ
    coefficient 系数 xì shù
    terminal velocity 收尾速度 shōu wěi sù dù
    parachutist 跳伞者 tiào sǎn zhě
    gravitational potential energy 重力势能 zhòng lì shì néng
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    3.3

    Conservation of linear momentum

    Syllabus
    1. state the principle of conservation of momentum
    2. apply the principle of conservation of momentum to solve simple problems, including elastic and inelastic interactions between objects in both one and two dimensions (knowledge of the concept of coefficient of restitution is not required)
    3. recall that, for an elastic collision, total kinetic energy is conserved and the relative speed of approach is equal to the relative speed of separation
    4. understand that, while momentum of a system is always conserved in interactions between objects, some change in kinetic energy may take place

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Conservation of momentum in a collision
    A car crash test
    In a crash, a large force acts over a very short time to change momentum.

    The principle

    For a system with no resultant external force, the total momentum stays constant. This is conservation of momentum 动量守恒.

    It always holds when there is no outside resultant force — in collisions, explosions 爆炸, and recoil 反冲. In two dimensions, momentum is conserved along each direction on its own.

    Worked example. A $2.0\ \text{kg}$ trolley and a $3.0\ \text{kg}$ trolley are held together against a compressed spring, then released from rest. The $2.0\ \text{kg}$ trolley flies off at $6.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the speed of the other trolley.

    The total momentum stays zero (it started at rest), so

    $$0 = (2.0)(6.0) + (3.0)(-v) \quad\Rightarrow\quad v = \frac{12}{3.0} = 4.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$$

    in the opposite direction.

    Two particles A and B with equal and opposite force arrows F pointing toward each other, illustrating Newton's third law in a two-body system
    Newton's third law in an isolated two-particle system: equal and opposite forces

    Elastic and inelastic collisions

    In every collision, momentum is conserved (if there is no outside resultant force).

    An elastic collision 弹性碰撞 is one where the total kinetic energy is also conserved. A quick test: in an elastic collision, the relative speed 相对速率 of approach equals the relative speed of separation.

    In an inelastic collision 非弹性碰撞, momentum is conserved but kinetic energy goes down — some becomes thermal, sound, or deformation 形变 energy. If the two objects stick together, the collision is perfectly inelastic.

    Solving collision problems (one dimension)

    Two particles A and B shown before and after a head-on collision: before, A moves right with u1 and B moves left with u2; after, A moves left with v1 and B moves right with v2
    Head-on collision: velocities before and after

    For two objects with masses $m_{1}, m_{2}$ and starting velocities $u_{1}, u_{2}$ that hit head-on 正面, write

    $$m_{1} u_{1} + m_{2} u_{2} = m_{1} v_{1} + m_{2} v_{2}.$$

    Use signed velocities (positive in one chosen direction). If the collision is elastic, add the relative-speed equation

    $$u_{1} - u_{2} = -(v_{1} - v_{2}),$$

    or, the same thing, $\tfrac{1}{2} m_{1} u_{1}^{2} + \tfrac{1}{2} m_{2} u_{2}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} m_{1} v_{1}^{2} + \tfrac{1}{2} m_{2} v_{2}^{2}$. That gives two equations for two unknowns.

    Worked example. A $1500\ \text{kg}$ car moving at $12\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ runs into a stationary $1000\ \text{kg}$ car and they lock together. Find their common velocity just after the collision.

    Momentum is conserved (the cars stick, so $v_{1} = v_{2} = v$):

    $$1500 \times 12 + 1000 \times 0 = (1500 + 1000)\,v \quad\Rightarrow\quad v = \frac{18\,000}{2500} = 7.2\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    A useful result for a head-on elastic collision of mass $m$ with a stationary 静止 mass $M$:

    $$v_{m} = \frac{m - M}{m + M} u, \qquad v_{M} = \frac{2m}{m + M} u.$$

    Collisions in two dimensions

    If the objects move in two dimensions, split the velocities into perpendicular 垂直 components 分量 and apply conservation of momentum along each direction on its own. For a collision where the objects hit at an angle, choose one axis along the first object's motion and one across it. The total momentum is conserved along each axis.

    A glancing collision: an incoming particle of mass m moving along the x-axis strikes a stationary particle; the two move off at angles phi and beta above and below the x-axis with velocities v1 and v2
    A glancing collision resolved along two perpendicular axes

    Rocket / pushing out mass

    A rocket pushes out gas at velocity $u$ (relative to itself) at a mass-flow rate 质量流率 $\dot m$ (kg per second). It feels a thrust

    $$F = \dot m \cdot u,$$

    which comes from $F = \Delta p / \Delta t$. The momentum given to the gas each second equals the thrust on the rocket (Newton's third law: the rocket pushes the gas one way, the gas pushes the rocket the other way).

    Explore

    A collision

    Set the masses and speeds, then collide them. Total momentum is conserved — the total before equals the total after.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    conservation of momentum 动量守恒 dòng liàng shǒu héng
    explosion 爆炸 bào zhà
    recoil 反冲 fǎn chōng
    elastic collision 弹性碰撞 tán xìng pèng zhuàng
    relative speed 相对速率 xiāng duì sù lǜ
    inelastic collision 非弹性碰撞 fēi tán xìng pèng zhuàng
    deformation 形变 xíng biàn
    head-on 正面 zhèng miàn
    stationary 静止 jìng zhǐ
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    mass-flow rate 质量流率 zhì liàng liú lǜ
    Exercise sheet
    3.3

    Exam tips

    • Newton's second law is $F = \Delta p / \Delta t$ (rate of change of momentum); $F = ma$ is the special case for constant mass.
    • Identify third-law pairs correctly: the same type of force, acting on two different bodies — not the balanced forces on one body.
    • Momentum is conserved in every collision; kinetic energy is conserved only in an elastic collision.
    • For terminal velocity, explain that drag rises with speed until drag $=$ weight, so the acceleration becomes zero.
  • 4 Forces, density and pressure
    4.1

    Turning effects of forces

    Syllabus
    1. understand that the weight of an object may be taken as acting at a single point known as its centre of gravity
    2. define and apply the moment of a force
    3. understand that a couple is a pair of forces that acts to produce rotation only
    4. define and apply the torque of a couple

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The principle of moments

    Centre of gravity

    The weight 重力 of a large object can be treated as acting at one single point, called the centre of gravity 重心 (the same as the centre of mass 质心 in a uniform gravitational field). For a uniform, regular shape — a rectangle, a sphere, a uniform rod — the centre of gravity is at the middle.

    When you draw a free-body diagram 受力图, always put the weight arrow at the centre of gravity.

    Moment of a force

    The moment 力矩 of a force about a point is

    $$M = F \cdot d,$$

    where $F$ is the size of the force and $d$ is the perpendicular distance 垂直距离 from the point to the line of action 作用线 of the force. Unit: $\text{N m}$.

    If the force acts at angle $\theta$ to a lever arm 力臂 of length $r$ from the pivot 支点, then $d = r\sin\theta$, so $M = F r\sin\theta$. Only the part of the force perpendicular 垂直 to the lever arm makes it turn.

    Worked example. A force of $50\ \text{N}$ is applied to the end of a spanner $0.40\ \text{m}$ long, at $30°$ to the spanner. Find the moment of the force about the nut.

    $$M = F r\sin\theta = 50 \times 0.40 \times \sin 30° = 50 \times 0.40 \times 0.50 = 10\ \text{N m}.$$
    A pivot with a force F acting at the end of a lever arm of length r at angle theta; the perpendicular distance d from the pivot to the force's line of action is shown as a dashed horizontal line
    The moment depends on the perpendicular distance $d$ from the pivot to the line of action of the force

    A moment is either clockwise 顺时针 or anticlockwise 逆时针 about the chosen point.

    Couple and torque

    A couple 力偶 is a pair of forces that are:

    • equal in size,
    • opposite in direction,
    • with their lines of action a perpendicular distance apart.

    A couple makes the body turn only — its resultant force is zero, so it gives no straight-line acceleration.

    The torque 力偶矩 of a couple is the turning effect it makes:

    $$\tau = F \cdot d,$$

    where $F$ is the size of one force and $d$ is the perpendicular distance between the two lines of action. Unit: $\text{N m}$. The torque is the same about any point — a special property of couples.

    A disc with two equal and opposite forces F applied at opposite ends, separated by the diameter 2r, with a curved arrow showing the torque turning the disc
    A couple: two equal and opposite forces, a distance apart, producing a torque

    A common multiple-choice trap: two equal forces in the same direction are not a couple (they have a resultant force and cause translation 平动). A couple needs equal size and opposite direction.

    Explore

    Balance the see-saw

    Put a weight on each side and slide it in or out. A small weight far from the pivot can balance a big weight close in — the beam is level when force × distance matches on both sides.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    centre of gravity 重心 zhòng xīn
    centre of mass 质心 zhì xīn
    free-body diagram 受力图 shòu lì tú
    moment 力矩 lì jǔ
    force
    perpendicular distance 垂直距离 chuí zhí jù lí
    line of action 作用线 zuò yòng xiàn
    lever arm 力臂 lì bì
    pivot 支点 zhī diǎn
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    clockwise 顺时针 shùn shí zhēn
    anticlockwise 逆时针 nì shí zhēn
    couple 力偶 lì ǒu
    torque 力偶矩 lì ǒu jǔ
    translation 平动 píng dòng
    Exercise sheet
    4.2

    Equilibrium of forces

    Syllabus
    1. state and apply the principle of moments
    2. understand that, when there is no resultant force and no resultant torque, a system is in equilibrium
    3. use a vector triangle to represent coplanar forces in equilibrium

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Conditions for equilibrium

    A body is in equilibrium 平衡 when:

    1. the resultant force 合力 is zero (no straight-line acceleration), AND
    2. the resultant moment about any point is zero (no angular acceleration 角加速度).

    Both must hold. A body with no resultant force can still be turning; a body with no resultant moment can still be moving in a straight line.

    Principle of moments

    For a body that is not turning, the total clockwise moment about any point equals the total anticlockwise moment about the same point. This is the principle of moments 力矩原理.

    To solve a balance problem:

    1. Choose a pivot — usually where an unknown force acts, so that force drops out (its distance is zero).
    2. List every force and its perpendicular distance from the pivot.
    3. Set $\sum M_{\text{clockwise}} = \sum M_{\text{anticlockwise}}$.
    4. Use $\sum F = 0$ if you need a second equation.

    A ruler balanced on a pivot with masses on each side is solved this way. For a heavy uniform rod, remember to include its weight acting at its centre of gravity.

    Worked example. A uniform beam of length $4.0\ \text{m}$ is pivoted at its centre. A $40\ \text{N}$ weight hangs $1.5\ \text{m}$ from the pivot on one side. How far from the pivot, on the other side, must a $30\ \text{N}$ weight hang to balance the beam?

    The beam's own weight acts at the centre (the pivot), so it has no moment. Setting clockwise $=$ anticlockwise moments:

    $$40 \times 1.5 = 30 \times d \quad\Rightarrow\quad d = \frac{60}{30} = 2.0\ \text{m}.$$
    A horizontal rule balanced on a central pivot with weights hanging at different distances; weights on the left give anticlockwise moments and weights on the right give clockwise moments
    Weights on a rule balanced at a pivot — used to test the principle of moments

    Vector triangle

    Three forces in the same plane that are in equilibrium can be drawn as a closed vector triangle 矢量三角形 — drawn tip-to-tail, the three arrows come back to the start. This is a drawing method instead of splitting into components 分量.

    Three forces in equilibrium (a weight W and two tensions) drawn tip to tail form a closed triangle that returns to the start
    Three forces in equilibrium form a closed vector triangle

    Use the sine rule 正弦定理 or the cosine rule 余弦定理 on the triangle to find unknown sizes or directions, or draw the triangle to scale on graph paper.

    You can also split each force into horizontal 水平 and vertical 竖直 components and set $\sum F_{x} = 0$ and $\sum F_{y} = 0$.

    Explore

    Forces in equilibrium

    When forces are balanced the resultant is zero — the vectors form a closed loop. Drag the arrows to keep them cancelling.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    equilibrium 平衡 píng héng
    resultant force 合力 hé lì
    angular acceleration 角加速度 jiǎo jiā sù dù
    principle of moments 力矩原理 lì jǔ yuán lǐ
    vector triangle 矢量三角形 shǐ liàng sān jiǎo xíng
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    sine rule 正弦定理 zhèng xián dìng lǐ
    cosine rule 余弦定理 yú xián dìng lǐ
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    vertical 竖直 shù zhí
    4.3

    Density

    Syllabus
    1. define and use density
    2. define and use pressure
    3. derive, from the definitions of pressure and density, the equation for hydrostatic pressure $\Delta p = \rho g \Delta h$
    4. use the equation $\Delta p = \rho g \Delta h$
    5. understand that the upthrust acting on an object in a fluid is due to a difference in hydrostatic pressure
    6. calculate the upthrust acting on an object in a fluid using the equation $F = \rho g V$ (Archimedes' principle)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A large iceberg floating in the sea
    An iceberg floats with most of its volume hidden: ice is slightly less dense than water.

    Density 密度 is the mass per unit volume:

    $$\rho = \frac{m}{V}.$$

    Unit: $\text{kg m}^{-3}$ (or $\text{g cm}^{-3}$; $1\ \text{g cm}^{-3} = 1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$). Density is a scalar 标量.

    Some useful densities to know:

    • water: $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$
    • air at room conditions: $\sim 1.2\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$
    • iron / steel: $\sim 7800\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    density 密度 mì dù
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    Exercise sheet
    4.3

    Pressure

    Pressure 压强 is the force per unit area, where the force acts at right angles to the surface:

    $$p = \frac{F}{A}.$$

    Unit: $\text{Pa} = \text{N m}^{-2}$. Pressure is a scalar.

    A precision aneroid barometer with a brass case and a white dial, its needle pointing to a scale marked in hectopascals (hPa) and inches of mercury (inHg)
    A precision aneroid barometer measures atmospheric pressure

    Hydrostatic pressure

    Take a column of fluid 流体 with density $\rho$, cross-sectional area 横截面积 $A$ and height $\Delta h$. Its weight is

    $$W = m g = (\rho \cdot A \cdot \Delta h) \cdot g.$$

    This weight presses down on the area $A$ at the bottom, so the extra pressure at the bottom compared with the top is

    $$\Delta p = \frac{W}{A} = \rho g \Delta h.$$

    This is the hydrostatic pressure 流体静压强 equation. It depends only on the density of the fluid and the depth 深度 — the shape of the container does not matter.

    Worked example. Find the extra pressure due to the water at the bottom of a swimming pool $2.5\ \text{m}$ deep. (Water density $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$.)

    $$\Delta p = \rho g \Delta h = 1000 \times 9.81 \times 2.5 \approx 2.5 \times 10^{4}\ \text{Pa}.$$
    A rectangular column of liquid of cross-sectional area A inside a container, with depths h1 to the top and h2 to the bottom marked; the column's weight W acts down and gives an extra pressure on its base
    A column of liquid of area $A$: its weight sets the extra pressure at the depth below

    For a submarine at depth $h$ below the surface, the pressure from the water is $\rho_{\text{seawater}}\, g\, h$. For the total pressure, add the atmospheric pressure 大气压强 at the surface (about $1.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$).

    Upthrust and Archimedes' principle

    When an object is submerged 浸没 in a fluid, the pressure at the bottom of the object is greater than the pressure at the top (by $\rho g \Delta h$, where $\Delta h$ is the object's height). This difference gives a net upward force called the upthrust 浮力.

    A block submerged in liquid showing a smaller downward force F_down on its top face and a larger upward force F_up on its bottom face, giving a net upthrust
    Upthrust arises because the pressure on the bottom of the object is greater than on the top

    For an object of volume $V$ (the volume of fluid displaced 排开), the upthrust is

    $$F_{\text{upthrust}} = \rho_{\text{fluid}}\, g\, V.$$

    This is Archimedes' principle 阿基米德原理: the upthrust on a body in a fluid equals the weight of the fluid it pushes aside.

    Worked example. A metal block of volume $2.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$ is fully submerged in water. Find the upthrust on it. (Water density $1000\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$.)

    $$F_{\text{upthrust}} = \rho_{\text{fluid}}\, g\, V = 1000 \times 9.81 \times 2.0 \times 10^{-3} \approx 20\ \text{N}.$$

    For a fully submerged object, $V$ is its full volume. For a floating 漂浮 object, $V$ is only the volume below the surface — the object floats when the upthrust on the part below the surface equals its weight.

    A block floats partly below the water line; its weight acts down and the upthrust on the submerged part acts up, and it floats when the upthrust equals the weight
    A floating object sinks until the upthrust on the submerged part equals its weight

    Force balance with upthrust

    A block held under water by a string tied to the bottom of the container is in equilibrium under three vertical forces: weight (down), tension 张力 (down), upthrust (up). Set $F_{\text{upthrust}} = W + T$ to find the tension.

    A submerged block hanging from a newton meter 弹簧测力计 reads less than its weight in air, because of the upthrust: reading $= W - F_{\text{upthrust}}$.

    The upthrust depends on the fluid density and the displaced volume, not on the object's material or depth (for an incompressible 不可压缩 fluid). On a planet with smaller $g$, the upthrust is smaller in the same ratio as the weight, so a floating object still floats with the same fraction below the surface.

    Explore

    Pressure with depth

    p = ρg·h

    Pressure is proportional to depth — the gradient is ρg.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    fluid 流体 liú tǐ
    cross-sectional area 横截面积 héng jié miàn jī
    hydrostatic pressure 流体静压强 liú tǐ jìng yā qiáng
    depth 深度 shēn dù
    atmospheric pressure 大气压强 dà qì yā qiáng
    submerged 浸没 jìn mò
    upthrust 浮力 fú lì
    displaced 排开 pái kāi
    Archimedes' principle 阿基米德原理 ā jī mǐ dé yuán lǐ
    floating 漂浮 piāo fú
    tension 张力 zhāng lì
    newton meter 弹簧测力计 tán huáng cè lì jì
    incompressible 不可压缩 bù kě yā suō
    4.3

    Exam tips

    • Take moments about a chosen pivot; for equilibrium, total clockwise $=$ total anticlockwise moments and the resultant force is zero.
    • A body in equilibrium under three forces gives a closed triangle of forces.
    • Fluid pressure $= \rho g h$; upthrust $=$ weight of fluid displaced (Archimedes).
    • Distinguish mass, weight and density, and give the base unit each time.
  • 5 Work, energy and power
    5.1

    Work, energy and power

    Syllabus
    1. understand the concept of work, and recall and use $\text{work done} = \text{force} \times \text{displacement in the direction of the force}$
    2. recall and apply the principle of conservation of energy
    3. recall and understand that the efficiency of a system is the ratio of useful energy output from the system to the total energy input
    4. use the concept of efficiency to solve problems
    5. define power as work done per unit time
    6. solve problems using $P = W/t$
    7. derive $P = Fv$ and use it to solve problems

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A row of wind turbines
    Wind turbines transfer the kinetic energy of the wind into electrical energy.

    Work done by a force

    Work is done when a force moves its point of contact along the line of the force. The work done by a constant force $F$ that causes a displacement 位移 $s$ is

    $$W = F \cdot s \cdot \cos\theta,$$

    where $\theta$ is the angle between the force and the displacement. Only the component 分量 of the force along the displacement does work.

    A block on a surface pulled by a force F at angle theta to the horizontal displacement s; F is split into the component F cos theta along s and the perpendicular component F sin theta, and only F cos theta does work
    Only the component of the force along the displacement ($F\cos\theta$) does work

    Worked example. A child pulls a sledge $5.0\ \text{m}$ across the snow with a rope, using a force of $20\ \text{N}$ at $60°$ to the ground. Find the work done by the rope.

    $$W = Fs\cos\theta = 20 \times 5.0 \times \cos 60° = 20 \times 5.0 \times 0.50 = 50\ \text{J}.$$

    Unit: $\text{J} = \text{N m}$. Work is a scalar 标量.

    Special cases:

    • force in the same direction as the motion ($\theta = 0$): $W = Fs$, positive work, energy 能量 given to the object.
    • force at right angles to the motion ($\theta = 90°$): $W = 0$. The normal contact force 支持力 on a car on a flat road does no work.
    • force opposite to the motion ($\theta = 180°$): $W = -Fs$, negative work, energy taken from the object (for example friction 摩擦力).
    Two diagrams: top, the force F points along the displacement s, giving positive work W = +Fs and energy to the object; bottom, the force F points opposite to the displacement s, giving negative work W = -Fs and taking energy from the object
    Positive work ($W = +Fs$): force along the motion (top). Negative work ($W = -Fs$): force opposite to the motion, e.g. friction (bottom)

    For an object moving up a slope at angle $\alpha$ to the horizontal 水平, the work done against gravity in rising a height $h$ is $mgh$, while the work done by a horizontal push over the slope length $L$ uses $\cos\alpha$.

    Conservation of energy

    Energy is never made or destroyed — it only changes from one form to another, or moves from one object to another. In a closed system 封闭系统, the total energy stays constant. This is conservation of energy 能量守恒.

    When you write an energy equation, list every form the energy starts as and ends as. Common forms in this syllabus: kinetic, gravitational potential, elastic potential energy 弹性势能, electrical 电能, thermal, sound, chemical energy 化学能.

    A ball rolling down a frictionless 无摩擦 ramp 斜坡 turns gravitational potential energy 重力势能 into kinetic energy 动能: $mgh = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$, so $v = \sqrt{2gh}$. With friction, some of this energy becomes thermal energy 热能 of the ramp and the air.

    Three energy bars for a ball descending a frictionless ramp: at the top all the energy is GPE, at the middle it is half GPE and half KE, at the bottom it is all KE — the total height stays the same
    On a frictionless ramp, GPE turns into KE while the total energy stays constant

    Worked example. A ball is released from rest at the top of a smooth ramp $1.2\ \text{m}$ high. Find its speed at the bottom (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    All the gravitational potential energy becomes kinetic energy, so $v = \sqrt{2gh}$ (the mass cancels):

    $$v = \sqrt{2 \times 9.81 \times 1.2} \approx 4.9\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Efficiency

    The efficiency 效率 of a system is

    $$\text{efficiency} = \frac{\text{useful energy output}}{\text{total energy input}} \times 100\%.$$

    The same idea with power:

    $$\text{efficiency} = \frac{\text{useful power output}}{\text{total power input}} \times 100\%.$$

    Efficiency is always less than 100% in a real system, because some input energy becomes "useless" forms — usually thermal energy.

    Of the total energy input, a thick arrow shows the useful output and a thinner arrow the energy wasted as heat; efficiency is the useful output divided by the total input
    Efficiency: only part of the energy input leaves as useful output; the rest is wasted, usually as heat

    For an electric motor lifting a load with efficiency $\eta$ at voltage 电压 $V$ and current 电流 $I$, the useful output power is $\eta V I$. From this you can find a force, a lifting speed, or a tension 张力.

    Worked example. An electric motor lifts a $50\ \text{kg}$ load at a steady $0.40\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ while drawing $250\ \text{W}$ of electrical power. Find its efficiency (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    The useful output power is $P = mgv = 50 \times 9.81 \times 0.40 = 196\ \text{W}$, so

    $$\text{efficiency} = \frac{196}{250} \times 100\% \approx 78\%.$$
    Explore

    Energy flow & efficiency

    The input energy divides into useful work and wasted energy; efficiency = useful ÷ input, and useful + wasted always equals the input.

    Explore

    Work, energy & power

    PE + KE = constant

    Work transfers energy; as it falls, PE becomes KE with the total fixed.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    work gōng
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    component 分量 fèn liàng
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    normal contact force 支持力 zhī chí lì
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    horizontal 水平 shuǐ píng
    closed system 封闭系统 fēng bì xì tǒng
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    elastic potential energy 弹性势能 tán xìng shì néng
    electrical energy 电能 diàn néng
    chemical energy 化学能 huà xué néng
    frictionless 无摩擦 wú mó cā
    ramp 斜坡 xié pō
    gravitational potential energy 重力势能 zhòng lì shì néng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    efficiency 效率 xiào lǜ
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    current 电流 diàn liú
    tension 张力 zhāng lì
    5.1

    Power

    Power 功率 is the rate of doing work, or the rate of transferring energy:

    Power is work per second: the same work done in less time means more power
    The same work done in less time means more power
    $$P = \frac{W}{t} = \frac{\Delta E}{\Delta t}.$$

    Unit: $\text{W} = \text{J s}^{-1}$. Power is a scalar.

    Power, force and velocity

    For an object moving at velocity 速度 $v$ with a force $F$ along the direction of motion, in a short time $\Delta t$ the displacement is $v\,\Delta t$ and the work done is $F v\,\Delta t$. Dividing by $\Delta t$:

    $$P = F v.$$

    This is one of the most useful results in mechanics.

    Worked example. A car travels at a steady $25\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ against a total resistive force of $600\ \text{N}$. Find the output power of its engine.

    At constant speed the driving force equals the resistive force, so

    $$P = Fv = 600 \times 25 = 15\,000\ \text{W} = 15\ \text{kW}.$$
    • For a car at constant velocity $v$ on a flat road, the engine power must balance the total resistive force: $P = F_{\text{resist}} \cdot v$. If the drag 阻力 grows with $v^{2}$, doubling the speed roughly quadruples the power needed.
    • For lifting a weight 重力 $mg$ straight up at constant speed $v$, the useful output power is $P = mg \cdot v$.
    • For an aircraft hovering at a fixed height, the lift force equals the weight, and a large power is needed because air must be pushed downwards all the time.
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    drag 阻力 zǔ lì
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    5.2

    Gravitational potential energy

    Syllabus
    1. derive, using $W = Fs$, the formula $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg\Delta h$ for gravitational potential energy changes in a uniform gravitational field
    2. recall and use the formula $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg\Delta h$ for gravitational potential energy changes in a uniform gravitational field
    3. derive, using the equations of motion, the formula for kinetic energy $E_{\text{K}} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2$
    4. recall and use $E_{\text{K}} = \frac{1}{2}mv^2$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Energy exchange in a pendulum

    In a uniform gravitational field (close to a planet's surface), the change in gravitational potential energy of mass 质量 $m$ rising or falling through a height $\Delta h$ is

    $$\Delta E_{\text{P}} = m g \Delta h.$$

    Where it comes from

    The work done against gravity to raise a mass $m$ slowly (no change in kinetic energy) through height $\Delta h$ equals the gravitational potential energy gained:

    • the gravitational force on the mass is $mg$ downwards,
    • the force needed to lift it slowly is $mg$ upwards,
    • the work done by this force is $W = F \cdot s = mg \cdot \Delta h$,
    • this work becomes $\Delta E_{\text{P}}$.

    So $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg \Delta h$. To use it you need $m$ and $\Delta h$ (and $g$). You do not need speed or time.

    A steep path and a gentle zig-zag path both rise to the same height h; the gain in gravitational PE is mgh either way, because only the height matters
    Gravitational PE depends only on the height risen, not the path taken
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    Exercise sheet
    5.2

    Kinetic energy

    The kinetic energy of an object of mass $m$ moving at speed $v$ is

    $$E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}.$$

    Where it comes from

    Apply a resultant force $F$ to a mass $m$ that starts at rest. It speeds up evenly from $0$ to $v$ over a displacement $s$. From $v^{2} = u^{2} + 2as$ with $u = 0$,

    $$s = \frac{v^{2}}{2a}.$$

    The work done on the mass is

    $$W = F \cdot s = m a \cdot \frac{v^{2}}{2a} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}.$$

    All this work becomes kinetic energy, so $E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$.

    Kinetic energy and momentum

    Combining $p = mv$ and $E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$:

    $$E_{\text{K}} = \frac{p^{2}}{2m}.$$

    This is handy when the momentum 动量 is given but not the velocity. For a momentum change from $p_{1}$ to $p_{2}$ at constant mass, the change in kinetic energy is $(p_{2}^{2} - p_{1}^{2}) / (2m)$.

    Explore

    Kinetic & potential energy

    PE + KE = constant

    Potential energy turns into kinetic energy — the total never changes.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    5.2

    Using energy methods

    A useful plan for problems that mix forces and energy:

    1. Find the start and end states. Write the kinetic and potential energies in each.
    2. List any work done by outside forces (friction, a push). Friction usually takes energy out; a push can add it.
    3. Conservation of energy: $E_{\text{start}} + W_{\text{in}} = E_{\text{end}} + W_{\text{lost as heat etc.}}$.

    Examples:

    • A box pushed at constant velocity up a ramp of length $L$ rising by $h$: $E_{\text{K}}$ does not change, so the work done by the push goes into $\Delta E_{\text{P}}$ plus the work done against friction.
    • A block sliding into a spring 弹簧 with kinetic energy $E_{\text{K}}$ on a frictionless surface: at greatest compression 压缩 $x$, all the kinetic energy has become elastic potential energy $\tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2}$ (where $k$ is the spring constant 劲度系数).
    • A ball dropped from height $h_{1}$ that bounces to height $h_{2}$: the ratio $h_{2}/h_{1}$ is the fraction of mechanical energy kept, $h_{2}/h_{1} = (v_{\text{up}}/v_{\text{down}})^{2}$.
    • A projectile 抛体 thrown to the same height at different angles: the final speed is the same (only the height matters); use components to get its direction.
    A block moving at speed v (kinetic energy one-half m v squared) slides into a spring; at greatest compression x all that energy has become elastic PE one-half k x squared
    A block's kinetic energy becomes elastic potential energy as it compresses the spring
    Explore

    Conservation of energy

    Drop the mass and watch GPE turn into KE. With no friction the total energy stays the same — that's the energy method.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    spring 弹簧 tán huáng
    compression 压缩 yā suō
    spring constant 劲度系数 jìn dù xì shù
    projectile 抛体 pāo tǐ
    5.2

    Exam tips

    • Work $=$ force $\times$ distance moved in the direction of the force — use $Fs\cos\theta$ when they are at an angle.
    • Use conservation of energy: loss in GPE $=$ gain in KE ($+$ work done against resistance).
    • Power $=$ work $/$ time $= Fv$; efficiency $=$ useful output $\div$ total input.
    • GPE uses the vertical height gained, not the distance along a slope.
  • 6 Deformation of solids
    6.1

    Forces that cause deformation

    Syllabus
    1. understand that deformation is caused by tensile or compressive forces (forces and deformations will be assumed to be in one dimension only)
    2. understand and use the terms load, extension, compression and limit of proportionality
    3. recall and use Hooke's law
    4. recall and use the formula for the spring constant $k = F/x$
    5. define and use the terms stress, strain and the Young modulus
    6. describe an experiment to determine the Young modulus of a metal in the form of a wire

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Hooke's law & the elastic limit

    When a force acts on a solid along its length, the object changes shape (deformation 形变). Two cases (treated as one-dimensional here):

    • a tensile 拉伸 force stretches the object — it makes an extension 伸长量 $x$,
    • a compressive force squeezes the object — it makes a compression 压缩, treated as a negative extension.

    The applied force is the load 负载. The change from the natural length is the extension (or compression).

    Explore

    Hooke's law spring

    Hang a load on the real spring: up to the elastic limit the extension is proportional to the force; beyond it the spring is stretched for good.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    deformation 形变 xíng biàn
    tensile 拉伸 lā shēn
    extension 伸长量 shēn cháng liàng
    compression 压缩 yā suō
    load 负载 fù zài
    Exercise sheet
    6.1

    Hooke's law and the spring constant

    A coiled metal spring
    A spring obeys Hooke's law: extension is proportional to the force applied.

    For many materials at small extensions, the extension is proportional to the load — this is Hooke's law 胡克定律. The constant that links them is the spring constant 劲度系数 $k$:

    $$F = kx \qquad\Longleftrightarrow\qquad k = \frac{F}{x}.$$

    Unit of $k$: $\text{N m}^{-1}$.

    Worked example. A spring stretches by $4.0\ \text{cm}$ when a $2.0\ \text{N}$ load is hung from it. Find its spring constant.

    Converting the extension to metres ($4.0\ \text{cm} = 0.040\ \text{m}$):

    $$k = \frac{F}{x} = \frac{2.0}{0.040} = 50\ \text{N m}^{-1}.$$
    A load against extension graph: a straight line from the origin up to point P, then the line curves and flattens
    A load–extension graph: straight up to the limit of proportionality $P$, then it curves

    Reading a graph:

    • A force–extension ($F$ against $x$) graph has gradient $k$ in the Hooke's-law region.
    • An extension–force ($x$ against $F$) graph has gradient $1/k$ in the Hooke's-law region.

    A common trap: if a graph plots length $L$ against force, you can still find the spring constant from the gradient (since $L = L_{0} + F/k$, the gradient is $1/k$ — read it off carefully).

    Limit of proportionality

    Hooke's law only holds up to the limit of proportionality 比例极限. Past this point the $F$ against $x$ line curves and is no longer straight. The material may still be elastic 弹性 (it returns to its first length when you remove the load) a little further, then it becomes plastic 塑性.

    Springs in series and parallel

    You may need to combine spring constants:

    • Series 串联 (one spring hangs from another): the same load passes through both, the total extension is the sum, so $\dfrac{1}{k_{\text{total}}} = \dfrac{1}{k_{1}} + \dfrac{1}{k_{2}}$.
    • Parallel 并联 (two springs side by side holding the same load): each takes half the load (if they are identical), the extensions are equal, so $k_{\text{total}} = k_{1} + k_{2}$.
    Two springs in series, end to end, combine as 1/k = 1/k1 + 1/k2; two springs in parallel, side by side, combine as k = k1 + k2
    Combining spring constants: series gives a softer spring, parallel a stiffer one
    Explore

    Hooke's law

    F = k·x

    Force is proportional to extension — the gradient is the spring constant k.

    Explore

    Hooke's law

    F = kx

    Up to the limit, extension is proportional to force — the gradient is the spring constant k.

    Explore

    Hooke's law: F = kx

    F = ax

    Drag the spring constant. Force is proportional to extension — a straight line through the origin whose gradient is the spring constant.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Hooke's law 胡克定律 hú kè dìng lǜ
    spring constant 劲度系数 jìn dù xì shù
    limit of proportionality 比例极限 bǐ lì jí xiàn
    elastic 弹性 tán xìng
    plastic 塑性 sù xìng
    series 串联 chuàn lián
    parallel 并联 bìng lián
    6.1

    Stress, strain and the Young modulus

    For a wire of uniform cross-section under a tensile load:

    • Stress 应力 $\sigma = \dfrac{F}{A}$, where $F$ is the load and $A$ is the cross-sectional area 横截面积. Unit: $\text{Pa}$.
    • Strain 应变 $\varepsilon = \dfrac{x}{L_{0}}$, where $x$ is the extension and $L_{0}$ is the original length. Strain has no unit (it is a ratio of lengths).
    A wire of original length L0 and cross-sectional area A clamped at the top with a load F hanging from it; stress is F over A and strain is the extension x over L0
    Stress is the load per cross-sectional area; strain is the extension per original length

    The Young modulus 杨氏模量 is the ratio of stress to strain in the Hooke's-law region:

    $$E = \frac{\sigma}{\varepsilon} = \frac{F / A}{x / L_{0}} = \frac{F L_{0}}{A x}.$$

    Unit: $\text{Pa}$ (about $10^{11}$ for metals; e.g. steel $\approx 2.0 \times 10^{11}$ Pa).

    Worked example. A steel wire of length $2.0\ \text{m}$ and cross-sectional area $1.5 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}^{2}$ stretches by $1.0\ \text{mm}$ under a load of $15\ \text{N}$. Find the Young modulus.

    $$E = \frac{F L_{0}}{A x} = \frac{15 \times 2.0}{(1.5 \times 10^{-7})(1.0 \times 10^{-3})} = 2.0 \times 10^{11}\ \text{Pa}.$$
    A stress against strain graph: a straight line from the origin up to point P, then the line curves over
    A stress–strain graph, straight up to the limit of proportionality $P$

    The Young modulus is a property of the material — it does not depend on the wire's shape or size. The spring constant $k$ depends on both the material and the size: $k = EA/L_{0}$.

    Experiment to find the Young modulus of a metal wire

    A standard setup:

    1. Clamp one end of a long, thin wire to a fixed support. Pass the wire over a pulley 滑轮 at the edge of the bench so it hangs straight down.
    2. Measure the original length $L_{0}$ between the clamp and a marker near the pulley, using a metre rule.
    3. Measure the diameter 直径 $d$ of the wire at several places with a micrometer 螺旋测微器 and take the average. Work out $A = \pi d^{2}/4$.
    4. Hang weights one at a time. Record the load $F$ and the extension $x$ (how far the marker moves against a fixed scale).
    5. Plot $F$ against $x$. In the straight region the gradient is $EA/L_{0}$, so $E = \text{gradient} \times L_{0}/A$.

    Why a long, thin wire? To make the extension big enough to measure well. Why repeat readings and measure $d$ at several places? To reduce random error 随机误差 and check the wire is uniform.

    A long wire clamped at one end, running horizontally over a pulley at the edge of a bench, with a paper flag marker on the wire read against a fixed scale and masses hanging from the end past the pulley
    Apparatus for measuring the Young modulus of a wire
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    stress 应力 yīng lì
    cross-sectional area 横截面积 héng jié miàn jī
    strain 应变 yìng biàn
    Young modulus 杨氏模量 yáng shì mó liàng
    pulley 滑轮 huá lún
    diameter 直径 zhí jìng
    micrometer 螺旋测微器 luó xuán cè wēi qì
    random error 随机误差 suí jī wù chā
    6.2

    Elastic and plastic behaviour

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the terms elastic deformation, plastic deformation and elastic limit
    2. understand that the area under the force–extension graph represents the work done
    3. determine the elastic potential energy of a material deformed within its limit of proportionality from the area under the force–extension graph
    4. recall and use $E_p = \frac{1}{2}Fx = \frac{1}{2}kx^2$ for a material deformed within its limit of proportionality

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    As the load grows:

    1. Elastic and straight (Hooke obeyed) — up to the limit of proportionality. Removing the load returns the object to its first length.
    2. Elastic but curved — between the limit of proportionality and the elastic limit 弹性极限. The extension is no longer straight in the load, but on unloading the object still returns to its first length.
    3. Plastic — past the elastic limit. On unloading, the object does not return to its first length; a permanent extension stays.

    Hooke's law only holds in the straight, elastic region.

    A force against extension graph with the loading line passing through the limit of proportionality P and the elastic limit E, and a dashed unloading line returning to a permanent extension B on the extension axis
    Force–extension past the elastic limit: $P$ and $E$ marked, with a permanent extension $B$ left after unloading
    Two modern universal testing machines: a sample is held between two grips on a tall rigid frame, and the machine pulls the grips apart while measuring the force and the extension
    A modern universal (tensile) testing machine stretches a sample and records the force and extension

    On a force–extension graph for a material taken into the plastic region and then unloaded, the loading line and the unloading line are different. The unloading line is parallel to the first Hooke line but shifted to the right (the permanent extension left when the load reaches zero). The area between the loading and unloading lines is the energy turned into thermal energy 热能 in the material.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    elastic limit 弹性极限 tán xìng jí xiàn
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    6.2

    Energy stored in a stretched material

    The work done in stretching a material from $0$ to extension $x$, as the load grows from $0$ to $F$, is the area under the force–extension graph.

    A straight force against extension line with the triangle between the line and the extension axis shaded, labelled area equals one half F x
    The work done stretching a material is the area under the force–extension graph

    Hooke's-law material

    When Hooke's law holds, the $F$ against $x$ graph is a straight line through the origin. The area under it from $0$ to $x$ is a triangle:

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} F x = \tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2}.$$

    This is the elastic potential energy 弹性势能 stored in a spring or wire stretched within its limit of proportionality. An equal form:

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \frac{F^{2}}{2k}.$$

    Worked example. A spring of spring constant $50\ \text{N m}^{-1}$ is stretched by $0.20\ \text{m}$, within its limit of proportionality. Find the elastic potential energy stored.

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} \times 50 \times 0.20^{2} = 1.0\ \text{J}.$$

    Non-Hooke material

    For a graph that is not a straight line (a stretched rubber band, or a spring past its limit of proportionality), find the area by counting grid squares or by using trapezia 梯形. The same idea holds: the area under the force–extension graph is the work done on the material.

    Comparing stored energy

    A common multiple-choice case: two materials are stretched by the same force, or by the same extension. Using $E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} F x$:

    • same $F$, smaller $k$ (less stiff) → larger $x$ → more energy stored.
    • same $x$, larger $k$ (stiffer) → larger $F$ → more energy stored.

    When a stretched spring is released onto a mass, the elastic potential energy becomes kinetic energy 动能 (and gravitational potential energy if the mass rises). Set $\tfrac{1}{2} k x^{2}$ equal to $\tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$ (plus any $mgh$) to find the speed or height.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    elastic potential energy 弹性势能 tán xìng shì néng
    trapezia 梯形 tī xíng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    6.2

    Exam tips

    • Hooke's law ($F = kx$) holds only up to the limit of proportionality.
    • Stress $= F/A$, strain $= x/L$, Young modulus $=$ stress$/$strain (gradient of the straight part of the stress-strain graph) — watch the units (Pa).
    • Energy stored $=$ area under the force-extension graph $= \frac{1}{2}Fx$ in the elastic region.
    • Distinguish elastic (returns to shape) from plastic (permanent) deformation.
  • 7 Waves
    7.1

    Progressive waves

    Syllabus
    1. describe what is meant by wave motion as illustrated by vibration in ropes, springs and ripple tanks
    2. understand and use the terms displacement, amplitude, phase difference, period, frequency, wavelength and speed
    3. understand the use of the time-base and $y$-gain of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (CRO) to determine frequency and amplitude
    4. derive, using the definitions of speed, frequency and wavelength, the wave equation $v = f\lambda$
    5. recall and use $v = f\lambda$
    6. understand that energy is transferred by a progressive wave
    7. recall and use $\text{intensity} = \text{power}/\text{area}$ and $\text{intensity} \propto (\text{amplitude})^2$ for a progressive wave

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Concentric ripples spreading on water
    Ripples spreading on water are progressive waves that carry energy outward.
    Two waves of the same frequency shifted by a phase difference
    Two waves of the same frequency, shifted by a phase difference

    A wave carries energy 能量 from one place to another without moving matter overall. The particles of the medium 介质 oscillate 振动 about fixed rest positions; only the disturbance (and its energy) propagates 传播. Examples: a transverse wave 横波 on a rope, a longitudinal wave 纵波 on a slinky spring, ripples on water, and sound in air. A wave that travels and carries energy is a progressive wave 行波.

    Key terms

    • displacement 位移 $y$ — how far a particle has moved from its rest position at a moment. A vector 矢量.
    • amplitude 振幅 $A$ — the largest displacement from the rest position.
    • wavelength 波长 $\lambda$ — the shortest distance along the wave between two points that move in phase 同相 (for example, two next-door crests 波峰).
    • period 周期 $T$ — the time for one full oscillation of a particle.
    • frequency 频率 $f$ — the number of full oscillations per second; $f = 1/T$. Unit: hertz 赫兹, $\text{Hz}$.
    • speed 速率 $v$ — how fast a crest travels along the medium.
    • phase difference 相位差 — the fraction of a cycle by which one oscillation leads or lags another. Given in radians 弧度 (a full cycle is $2\pi$) or degrees (a full cycle is $360°$).

    Two points one wavelength apart are in phase (phase difference 0 or $2\pi$). Two points half a wavelength apart are exactly out of phase (phase difference $\pi$).

    The wave equation

    In one period $T$, the wave moves forward by one wavelength $\lambda$. So speed $= \text{distance} / \text{time} = \lambda / T = \lambda f$:

    $$v = f \lambda.$$

    This comes straight from the definitions of speed, frequency and wavelength, and works for every progressive wave.

    Reading a CRO trace

    A cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器 (CRO) draws a voltage signal — for sound, the output of a microphone — against time. Two controls matter:

    • time-base 时基 (seconds per division across): turns horizontal distance on the screen into time. Read the period $T$ as the distance between two next-door peaks, then $f = 1/T$.
    • y-gain 垂直增益 (volts per division up): turns vertical distance into voltage. The amplitude in volts is the peak height from the centre line.

    If the time-base is $5\ \text{ms}/\text{div}$ and one full cycle takes $4$ divisions, then $T = 4 \times 5\ \text{ms} = 20\ \text{ms}$ and $f = 50\ \text{Hz}$.

    A cathode-ray oscilloscope screen with a square grid and a sine trace; the period  is marked as the horizontal distance between two next-door peaks, spanning four divisions, with scale bars showing one division across and one division up
    Reading the period T from a CRO trace using the grid and time-base
    A modern digital oscilloscope with a grid screen showing a yellow voltage signal against time, a row of control knobs and buttons, and four probe leads plugged into the input sockets
    A real oscilloscope: the grid lets you read off the period and the amplitude

    Intensity of a wave

    A wave carries energy. The intensity 强度 at a point is the power 功率 passing through unit area at right angles to the direction of travel:

    $$I = \frac{P}{A}.$$

    Unit: $\text{W m}^{-2}$.

    Intensity is proportional to the square of the amplitude:

    $$I \propto A^{2}.$$

    For a point source 点源 sending out energy equally in all directions, the wavefronts 波前 are spheres; the surface area at distance $r$ is $4\pi r^{2}$, so

    $$I = \frac{P}{4\pi r^{2}}, \qquad I \propto \frac{1}{r^{2}}.$$

    Doubling the distance cuts the intensity to a quarter, which means the amplitude is halved (since $I \propto A^{2}$).

    Worked example. A lamp emits $60\ \text{W}$ of light equally in all directions. Find the intensity of the light $2.0\ \text{m}$ away.

    $$I = \frac{P}{4\pi r^{2}} = \frac{60}{4\pi (2.0)^{2}} \approx 1.2\ \text{W m}^{-2}.$$
    Explore

    Progressive waves

    y = a sin(bx + c)

    A wave: a is amplitude, b sets the wavelength, c the phase.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    wave
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    medium 介质 jiè zhì
    oscillate 振动 zhèn dòng
    transverse wave 横波 héng bō
    longitudinal wave 纵波 zòng bō
    progressive wave 行波 xíng bō
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    amplitude 振幅 zhèn fú
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    in phase 同相 tóng xiāng
    crest 波峰 bō fēng
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    hertz 赫兹 hè zī
    speed 速率 sù lǜ
    phase difference 相位差 xiàng wèi chà
    radian 弧度 hú dù
    propagate 传播 chuán bō
    cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器 shì bō qì
    time-base 时基 shí jī
    y-gain 垂直增益 chuí zhí zēng yì
    intensity 强度 qiáng dù
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    point source 点源 diǎn yuán
    wavefront 波前 bō qián
    7.2

    Transverse and longitudinal waves

    Syllabus
    1. compare transverse and longitudinal waves
    2. analyse and interpret graphical representations of transverse and longitudinal waves

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Transverse vs longitudinal waves

    Transverse waves

    The particles oscillate perpendicular 垂直 to the direction the energy travels. A wave on a rope, all electromagnetic waves, and S-waves in the Earth are transverse.

    Transverse wave on a rope drawn as a sine curve: each piece of rope vibrates up and down (a vertical double arrow), while the energy moves to the right along the rope
    Transverse wave on a rope

    Longitudinal waves

    The particles oscillate parallel to the direction the energy travels. Sound in any medium, P-waves in the Earth, and the squashes on a slinky are longitudinal. The wave is made of compressions 压缩 (higher pressure, particles close together) and rarefactions 稀疏 (lower pressure, particles spread out).

    Longitudinal wave on a slinky spring: the coils bunch into compressions and spread into rarefactions; each coil vibrates back and forth (a horizontal double arrow) parallel to the direction the energy travels
    Longitudinal wave on a slinky spring

    Graphs of waves

    A graph of particle displacement against position at one moment looks like a sine curve 正弦曲线 for both kinds of wave. The difference: for a transverse wave the displacement axis is the real sideways displacement; for a longitudinal wave it is the small back-and-forth displacement along the direction of travel (positive one way, negative the other).

    A displacement against distance graph drawn as a sine curve, with the amplitude  marked from the rest axis to a crest and the wavelength  marked between two next-door crests
    A displacement–distance graph shows the wave's amplitude and wavelength

    A graph of particle displacement against time at one point in space is also a sine curve for both kinds. Read the period $T$ from this graph.

    A displacement against time graph drawn as a sine curve, with the amplitude  marked from the rest axis to a peak and the period  marked between two next-door peaks
    A displacement–time graph shows the wave's amplitude and period
    Explore

    Transverse waves

    y = a sin(bx + c)

    Change the amplitude and wavelength of the wave.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    compression 压缩 yā suō
    rarefaction 稀疏 xī shū
    sine curve 正弦曲线 zhèng xián qū xiàn
    Exercise sheet
    7.3

    Doppler effect (moving source, stationary observer)

    Syllabus
    1. understand that when a source of sound waves moves relative to a stationary observer, the observed frequency is different from the source frequency (understanding of the Doppler effect for a stationary source and a moving observer is not required)
    2. use the expression $f_{\text{o}} = f_{\text{s}} v / (v \pm v_{\text{s}})$ for the observed frequency when a source of sound waves moves relative to a stationary observer

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    When the source 波源 of a sound moves relative to a stationary 静止 observer 观察者, the heard frequency is different from the source frequency. This is the Doppler effect 多普勒效应.

    • source moving towards the observer: the wavefronts in front are squashed, so the wavelength is shorter and the heard frequency is higher.
    • source moving away from the observer: the wavefronts behind are spread out, so the wavelength is longer and the heard frequency is lower.
    Circular wavefronts from a source moving to the right at speed  towards a stationary observer; the wavefronts ahead of the source (towards the observer) are bunched closer together and those behind (towards point P) are spread further apart
    A moving source squashes the wavefronts ahead of it, raising the observed frequency

    The formula (source moving at speed $v_{\text{s}}$ along the line to the observer; wave speed $v$, source frequency $f_{\text{s}}$, heard frequency $f_{\text{o}}$):

    $$f_{\text{o}} = \frac{v \cdot f_{\text{s}}}{v \pm v_{\text{s}}}.$$

    Choose the sign to match the physics:

    • minus sign on the bottom when the source moves towards the observer ($f_{\text{o}} > f_{\text{s}}$),
    • plus sign when the source moves away ($f_{\text{o}} < f_{\text{s}}$).

    You only need the case of a stationary observer.

    Worked example. A car horn at $f_{\text{s}} = 800\ \text{Hz}$ moves at $30\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ towards a still listener. Speed of sound $v = 340\ \text{m s}^{-1}$:

    $$f_{\text{o}} = \frac{340 \times 800}{340 - 30} = \frac{272\,000}{310} \approx 877\ \text{Hz}.$$
    Explore

    Doppler effect

    Send the source moving and watch the wavefronts bunch up ahead (higher pitch) and stretch out behind — the siren effect, controlled by the source's speed.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    source 波源 bō yuán
    stationary 静止 jìng zhǐ
    observer 观察者 guān chá zhě
    Doppler effect 多普勒效应 duō pǔ lè xiào yìng
    7.4

    Electromagnetic spectrum

    Syllabus
    1. state that all electromagnetic waves are transverse waves that travel with the same speed $c$ in free space
    2. recall the approximate range of wavelengths in free space of the principal regions of the electromagnetic spectrum from radio waves to $\gamma$-rays
    3. recall that wavelengths in the range 400–700 nm in free space are visible to the human eye

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    All electromagnetic waves 电磁波 (EM waves) are transverse and travel in a vacuum 真空 at the same speed:

    $$c = 3.00 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱 includes radio waves, microwaves 微波, infrared 红外线, visible light, ultraviolet 紫外线, X-rays X射线 and $\gamma$-rays γ射线.

    The electromagnetic spectrum as a horizontal band from radio waves to gamma rays, with a frequency scale in Hz above and a wavelength scale in m below; left to right the wavelength decreases and the frequency increases
    The electromagnetic spectrum

    Approximate wavelength ranges in free space (learn the orders of magnitude):

    • radio waves: $> 10^{-1}\ \text{m}$ (up to many km).
    • microwaves: $10^{-3}\ \text{m}$ to $10^{-1}\ \text{m}$.
    • infrared: $\sim 7 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ to $10^{-3}\ \text{m}$.
    • visible light: $400\ \text{nm}$ (violet) to $700\ \text{nm}$ (red), i.e. $4 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ to $7 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$.
    • ultraviolet: $\sim 10^{-8}\ \text{m}$ to $4 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$.
    • X-rays: $\sim 10^{-11}\ \text{m}$ to $10^{-8}\ \text{m}$.
    • $\gamma$-rays: $< 10^{-11}\ \text{m}$.

    The boundaries between regions are not sharp. Use $c = f\lambda$ to change between wavelength and frequency. Only light with wavelengths $400$$700\ \text{nm}$ can be seen.

    Explore

    Slide across the spectrum

    Radio waves, visible light and gamma rays are all the same wave — only the wavelength changes, and with it the frequency, photon energy and everyday use.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electromagnetic wave 电磁波 diàn cí bō
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱 diàn cí bō pǔ
    microwaves 微波 wēi bō
    infrared 红外线 hóng wài xiàn
    ultraviolet 紫外线 zǐ wài xiàn
    X-rays X射线 X shè xiàn
    gamma-rays γ射线 γ shè xiàn
    7.5

    Polarisation

    Syllabus
    1. understand that polarisation is a phenomenon associated with transverse waves
    2. recall and use Malus’s law ($I = I_0 \cos^2\theta$) to calculate the intensity of a plane-polarised electromagnetic wave after transmission through a polarising filter or a series of polarising filters (calculation of the effect of a polarising filter on the intensity of an unpolarised wave is not required)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Polarisation 偏振 means making a transverse wave oscillate in one plane only.

    • Only transverse waves can be polarised — the oscillation is perpendicular to the direction of travel, so different perpendicular planes are real choices.
    • Longitudinal waves (sound) cannot be polarised — the oscillation is along the direction of travel, so there is no other plane.

    So polarisation is a test: if a wave can be polarised, it must be transverse.

    Two diagrams along a direction of wave energy: an unpolarised wave with red vibration double-arrows pointing in many planes, and a polarised wave with a single red double-arrow in one plane
    Unpolarised waves vibrate in many planes; a polarised wave vibrates in one plane
    A clear plastic protractor glowing with bands of rainbow colour against a black background
    A see-through plastic protractor placed between two crossed polarising filters. Light only reaches your eye because the stressed plastic rotates its plane of polarisation — the colours map where the plastic is squeezed most. With ordinary light it would just look clear

    Malus's law

    Plane-polarised 平面偏振 light of intensity $I_{0}$ passes through a polarising filter 偏振片 whose transmission axis 透光轴 is at angle $\theta$ to the plane of polarisation. The transmitted intensity is given by Malus's law 马吕斯定律:

    $$I = I_{0} \cos^{2}\theta.$$
    • $\theta = 0°$: filter lined up with the polarisation, $I = I_{0}$, all passes through.
    • $\theta = 90°$: filter at right angles, $I = 0$, all blocked.
    • $\theta = 60°$: $I = I_{0} \cos^{2} 60° = I_{0} \cdot 0.25 = I_{0}/4$.

    Worked example. Plane-polarised light of intensity $12\ \text{W m}^{-2}$ meets a polarising filter whose axis is at $30°$ to the plane of polarisation. Find the transmitted intensity.

    $$I = I_{0}\cos^{2}\theta = 12 \times \cos^{2} 30° = 12 \times 0.75 = 9.0\ \text{W m}^{-2}.$$
    Unpolarised light passes through a polariser to become plane polarised, then meets an analyser: in (a) the analyser's transmission axis is crossed (at right angles) and no light passes; in (b) it is parallel and the polarised light passes through
    Crossed filters (a) block the light; parallel filters (b) let it pass

    For two filters in a row, use Malus's law twice with the angle between each pair. Be careful with the angle each time — after the first filter the polarisation is along that filter's axis, and the second filter's angle is measured from there.

    (You do not need to work out the effect of a polarising filter on an unpolarised wave.)

    Explore

    Polarisation intensity lab

    intensity changes with polariser angle

    Rotate a polariser and see why only transverse waves can be polarised.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    polarisation 偏振 piān zhèn
    plane-polarised 平面偏振 píng miàn piān zhèn
    polarising filter 偏振片 piān zhèn piàn
    transmission axis 透光轴 tòu guāng zhóu
    Malus's law 马吕斯定律 mǎ lǚ sī dìng lǜ
    7.5

    Exam tips

    • Define terms precisely (displacement, amplitude, wavelength, period, frequency) and use $v = f\lambda$.
    • Distinguish transverse (vibration perpendicular to travel) from longitudinal (parallel); only transverse waves can be polarised.
    • For the Doppler effect, the observed frequency rises as the source approaches and falls as it recedes.
    • Learn the electromagnetic spectrum order; all its waves travel at $c$ in a vacuum.
  • 8 Superposition
    8.1

    Principle of superposition

    Syllabus
    1. explain and use the principle of superposition
    2. show an understanding of experiments that demonstrate stationary waves using microwaves, stretched strings and air columns (it will be assumed that end corrections are negligible; knowledge of the concept of end corrections is not required)
    3. explain the formation of a stationary wave using a graphical method, and identify nodes and antinodes
    4. understand how wavelength may be determined from the positions of nodes or antinodes of a stationary wave

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Two waves make a standing wave

    When two or more waves overlap at a point, the displacement 位移 there is the vector sum 矢量和 of the displacements each wave would make on its own. This is the principle of superposition 叠加.

    The waves pass through each other and come out unchanged. Superposition is the base of everything in this topic.

    If two waves of amplitude 振幅 $A_{1}$ and $A_{2}$ meet:

    • in phase 同相 (crest 波峰 meets crest): the amplitude is $A_{1} + A_{2}$ (constructive interference 相长干涉).
    • exactly out of phase (crest meets trough 波谷, phase difference 相位差 $\pi$): the amplitude is $|A_{1} - A_{2}|$ (destructive interference 相消干涉).
    • any other phase difference $\phi$: the amplitude is somewhere between these two.
    Two identical waves drawn in phase, one above the other, adding to give a resultant wave of twice the amplitude
    Two waves arriving in phase add to give double the amplitude (constructive)
    Two identical waves drawn exactly out of phase adding to give a flat resultant line of zero amplitude
    Two waves arriving exactly out of phase cancel to zero (destructive)

    For intensity 强度, $I \propto A^{2}$. Two equal waves meeting in phase give intensity $(2A)^{2} = 4A^{2}$four times the intensity of one wave alone.

    Explore

    Adding two waves

    Two waves overlap and add. Line them up for constructive interference, or oppose them for destructive — change the phase to see both.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    wave
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    vector sum 矢量和 shǐ liàng hé
    superposition 叠加 dié jiā
    amplitude 振幅 zhèn fú
    in phase 同相 tóng xiāng
    crest 波峰 bō fēng
    constructive interference 相长干涉 xiāng zhǎng gān shè
    trough 波谷 bō gǔ
    phase difference 相位差 xiàng wèi chà
    destructive interference 相消干涉 xiāng xiāo gān shè
    intensity 强度 qiáng dù
    Exercise sheet
    8.1

    Stationary (standing) waves

    When two identical progressive waves 行波 travel in opposite directions and overlap, they make a stationary wave 驻波. Examples: a wave on a string reflected 反射 from a fixed end overlapping the incoming wave; sound in an air column reflected from a closed end; microwaves between an emitter and a metal sheet.

    Five stacked snapshots at t = 0, T/4, T/2, 3T/4 and T showing two progressive waves travelling in opposite directions and their resultant, with fixed nodes (N) and antinodes (A) marked across the top
    A stationary wave forms where two opposite waves overlap (N marks a node, A an antinode)

    Nodes and antinodes

    In a stationary wave:

    • node 波节 — a point that is always at zero displacement (the two waves always cancel). The distance between next-door nodes is $\lambda/2$.
    • antinode 波腹 — a point of largest amplitude (the two waves always add). The distance between next-door antinodes is $\lambda/2$.
    • a node and the next antinode are $\lambda/4$ apart.

    Particles between two nodes oscillate in phase with each other, but with different amplitudes (largest at the antinode, zero at the nodes). Particles on opposite sides of a node oscillate in antiphase 反相 (phase difference $\pi$).

    A stretched string vibrating in its fundamental mode: a single loop with a node at each fixed end and an antinode in the middle, length L equals half a wavelength
    Fundamental mode on a stretched string — one loop, with L equal to half a wavelength

    Worked example. A string of length $0.80\ \text{m}$ is fixed at both ends and vibrates in its fundamental mode, where the wave speed is $240\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the fundamental frequency.

    One loop fits the string, so $\lambda = 2L = 1.60\ \text{m}$. Then

    $$f = \frac{v}{\lambda} = \frac{240}{1.60} = 150\ \text{Hz}.$$

    How a stationary wave differs from a progressive wave: it does not carry energy 能量 along its length, the pattern does not move along, and the nodes stay fixed; a progressive wave has the same amplitude everywhere and carries energy.

    Measuring wavelength from node spacing

    Drive a string with a vibrator at frequency $f$ until a stationary pattern appears. Measure the distance between two well-separated nodes and divide by the number of half-wavelengths 波长 between them. Then $\lambda$ is known, and $v = f\lambda$ gives the wave speed.

    For a tube closed at one end and open at the other (a resonance tube 共鸣管), the closed end is a displacement node and the open end is a displacement antinode. The fundamental 基频 has $L = \lambda/4$; the next resonance is at $L = 3\lambda/4$; and so on. For a tube open at both ends, both ends are antinodes; the fundamental is at $L = \lambda/2$.

    A pipe closed at the bottom and open at the top, length L, with the displacement-amplitude curve showing a node (N) at the closed end and an antinode (A) at the open end
    Fundamental mode in a closed pipe — a node at the closed end, an antinode at the open end
    Explore

    Standing waves & harmonics

    A string fixed at both ends only resonates at its harmonics. Drag n to see the nodes, antinodes and how the wavelength changes.

    Explore

    Stationary waves

    y = y₁ + y₂

    Two waves superpose: where they reinforce you get antinodes, where they cancel, nodes.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    progressive wave 行波 xíng bō
    stationary wave 驻波 zhù bō
    reflected 反射 fǎn shè
    node 波节 bō jié
    antinode 波腹 bō fù
    antiphase 反相 fǎn xiāng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    resonance tube 共鸣管 gòng míng guǎn
    fundamental 基频 jī pín
    8.2

    Diffraction

    Syllabus
    1. explain the meaning of the term diffraction
    2. show an understanding of experiments that demonstrate diffraction including the qualitative effect of the gap width relative to the wavelength of the wave; for example diffraction of water waves in a ripple tank

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Diffraction 衍射 is the spreading of a wave after it passes through a gap or around an obstacle 障碍物. All waves diffract — water, sound, light, microwaves.

    The amount of spreading depends on the ratio of wavelength to gap width:

    • gap much wider than $\lambda$: very little spreading; the wave goes nearly straight through.
    • gap about the size of $\lambda$: a lot of spreading; the wave fans out.
    • gap smaller than $\lambda$: very strong spreading; the gap acts almost like a point source.

    Show this with water waves in a ripple tank 水波槽: straight waves meet a barrier with a gap, and the waves curve more as the gap is made narrower. The same idea is why you can hear someone around a corner (speech has $\lambda$ near 1 m, close to the gap size) but cannot see them (visible light has $\lambda \sim 500\ \text{nm}$, far smaller than the gap).

    Straight water waves in a ripple tank meeting a barrier with a gap: through a wide gap (a) they pass almost straight, through a narrow gap (b) they spread out in curved wavefronts
    Diffraction in a ripple tank — a wide gap (a) spreads the waves little, a narrow gap (b) much more
    Explore

    Waves adding and cancelling

    Two overlapping waves add where they are in phase and cancel where out of phase — change the phase to see the result. This is what makes diffraction patterns.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    diffraction 衍射 yǎn shè
    obstacle 障碍物 zhàng ài wù
    ripple tank 水波槽 shuǐ bō cáo
    8.3

    Interference

    Syllabus
    1. understand the terms interference and coherence
    2. show an understanding of experiments that demonstrate two-source interference using water waves in a ripple tank, sound, light and microwaves
    3. understand the conditions required if two-source interference fringes are to be observed
    4. recall and use $\lambda = ax / D$ for double-slit interference using light

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Two-slit interference
    An iridescent soap bubble
    The shifting colours on a soap bubble come from the interference of light.

    Interference 干涉 is the superposition of two coherent 相干 waves to give a steady pattern of high-amplitude regions (constructive) and low-amplitude regions (destructive).

    Overlapping circular wavefronts from two coherent point sources, with blue dots marking where crest meets crest and lines of maximum displacement fanning out from between the sources
    Two coherent sources give lines of maximum displacement where crests meet crests
    A real ripple-tank photograph: two sets of circular water waves from two side-by-side sources overlap, leaving calm lines (cancellation) fanning out between the two bright sets of ripples
    The same effect in a real ripple tank — two coherent sources give a steady interference pattern

    Coherence

    Two sources are coherent when they emit waves with a constant phase difference (which also needs the same frequency). Two separate lamps are not coherent — their phase changes randomly, so any pattern flickers too fast to see and you get only an average.

    To make coherent light from one source, pass it through two slits 狭缝 in a double-slit 双缝 setup. Both slits are lit by the same wavefront, so the two beams keep a fixed phase relationship.

    Conditions for a clear pattern

    To see two-source fringes you need:

    1. two coherent sources (constant phase difference).
    2. roughly equal amplitudes (or the dark regions are not very dark).
    3. the waves overlap where you look.
    4. for light (a transverse wave), the same plane of polarisation 偏振.

    Path difference

    For two coherent sources, what happens at a point depends on the path difference 路程差 $\Delta x$ between the two waves arriving there:

    • constructive: $\Delta x = n\lambda$ (for whole numbers $n = 0, 1, 2, \ldots$).
    • destructive: $\Delta x = (n + \tfrac{1}{2})\lambda$.

    Double-slit (Young's) experiment

    For two slits a distance $a$ apart, with a screen a distance $D$ away (assume $D \gg a$), light of wavelength $\lambda$ makes fringes on the screen.

    Monochromatic light through a single slit then a double slit a apart; diffracted light from each slit overlaps to form an interference pattern on a screen a distance D away, with fringe spacing x
    Young's double-slit experiment — the single slit makes the two slits coherent sources

    The fringe spacing 条纹间距 $x$ (one fringe 条纹 to the next) is

    $$\lambda = \frac{a x}{D}, \qquad x = \frac{\lambda D}{a}.$$

    Bright fringes (maximum 极大) are where the path difference is a whole number of $\lambda$; dark fringes (minimum 极小) where it is $(n + \tfrac{1}{2})\lambda$. The fringes are equally spaced.

    To make the fringe spacing smaller: increase $a$ (slits further apart), reduce $D$ (screen closer), or use a shorter $\lambda$ (bluer light).

    Worked example. In a double-slit experiment the slits are $0.50\ \text{mm}$ apart and lit by light of wavelength $600\ \text{nm}$. The screen is $2.0\ \text{m}$ away. Find the fringe spacing.

    $$x = \frac{\lambda D}{a} = \frac{(600 \times 10^{-9})(2.0)}{0.50 \times 10^{-3}} = 2.4 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m} = 2.4\ \text{mm}.$$
    Explore

    Interference

    y = y₁ + y₂

    In phase → constructive (bright/loud); antiphase → destructive (dark/quiet).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    interference 干涉 gān shè
    coherent 相干 xiāng gān
    slit 狭缝 xiá fèng
    double-slit 双缝 shuāng fèng
    polarisation 偏振 piān zhèn
    path difference 路程差 lù chéng chà
    fringe spacing 条纹间距 tiáo wén jiān jù
    fringe 条纹 tiáo wén
    maximum 极大 jí dà
    minimum 极小 jí xiǎo
    Exercise sheet
    8.4

    Diffraction grating

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $d \sin \theta = n\lambda$
    2. describe the use of a diffraction grating to determine the wavelength of light (the structure and use of the spectrometer are not included)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A diffraction grating 衍射光栅 has many equally spaced slits — often hundreds or thousands per millimetre. Each slit is a coherent source. A maximum is seen at angle $\theta$ from the normal 法线 to the grating when

    $$d \sin\theta = n \lambda,$$

    where $d$ is the slit spacing 缝间距 (centre to centre), $n = 0, \pm 1, \pm 2, \ldots$ is the order 级次, and $\lambda$ is the wavelength.

    Worked example. A diffraction grating has $500$ lines per mm. Light of wavelength $600\ \text{nm}$ is shone normally on it. Find the angle of the first-order ($n = 1$) maximum.

    The slit spacing is $d = \dfrac{1}{500}\ \text{mm} = 2.0 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{m}$, so

    $$\sin\theta = \frac{n\lambda}{d} = \frac{600 \times 10^{-9}}{2.0 \times 10^{-6}} = 0.30 \quad\Rightarrow\quad \theta \approx 17°.$$

    Compared with the double slit, a grating gives much sharper maxima, because more slits add together — every other direction is cancelled by many slits.

    A parallel beam of monochromatic light striking a diffraction grating and splitting into several sharp beams that reach a screen at different angles (the orders)
    A diffraction grating splits monochromatic light into sharp maxima on a screen

    Slit spacing from "lines per mm"

    If a grating has $N$ lines per millimetre, then $d = 1/N$ millimetres $= 10^{-3}/N$ metres. For $450$ lines per mm, $d = 1/450\ \text{mm} \approx 2.22\ \mu\text{m}$.

    Highest order

    For a given grating and wavelength, $\sin\theta = n\lambda/d$ cannot be more than $1$, so the highest order seen is

    $$n_{\text{max}} = \left\lfloor \frac{d}{\lambda} \right\rfloor.$$

    If $d/\lambda = 3.27$, orders up to $n = 3$ exist; $n = 4$ would need $\sin\theta > 1$ and is not seen.

    Finding $\lambda$ with a grating

    Shine parallel light of unknown wavelength straight at the grating. Measure the angle $\theta_{1}$ of the first-order maximum from the centre. Then $\lambda = d \sin\theta_{1}$. Repeating for higher orders and averaging reduces error.

    Explore

    Why the grating gives sharp maxima

    Two waves add when in phase and cancel when out of phase — change the phase and watch the resultant. A grating's many slits make the bright fringes razor-sharp.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    diffraction grating 衍射光栅 yǎn shè guāng shān
    normal 法线 fǎ xiàn
    slit spacing 缝间距 fèng jiān jù
    order 级次 jí cì
    8.4

    Exam tips

    • Two-source interference: constructive when path difference $= n\lambda$, destructive when $= (n + \tfrac{1}{2})\lambda$; the sources must be coherent.
    • Double slit: $\lambda = ax/D$; diffraction grating: $d\sin\theta = n\lambda$ — know every symbol.
    • On a stationary wave mark nodes and antinodes; adjacent nodes are $\lambda/2$ apart; it stores energy but does not transfer it.
    • A stationary wave needs two waves of the same frequency travelling in opposite directions.
  • 9 Electricity
    9.1

    Electric current

    Syllabus
    1. understand that an electric current is a flow of charge carriers
    2. understand that the charge on charge carriers is quantised
    3. recall and use $Q = It$
    4. use, for a current-carrying conductor, the expression $I = Anvq$, where $n$ is the number density of charge carriers

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An electric current 电流 is a flow of charge carriers 载流子. In a metal the carriers are negative conduction electrons 电子; in an electrolyte 电解质 they are positive and negative ions 离子; in a semiconductor 半导体 they may be electrons or "holes" 空穴. The conventional current 常规电流 direction is the way positive charge would flow — opposite to the real flow of electrons in a wire.

    Charge

    Charge is quantised 量子化: the smallest free unit of charge is the elementary charge 基本电荷

    $$e = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}.$$

    Every free charge in this syllabus is a whole-number multiple of $e$. The unit of charge is the coulomb 库仑, $\text{C}$.

    Current as the rate of flow of charge

    If charge $Q$ passes a point in time $t$, the current is

    $$I = \frac{Q}{t}, \qquad Q = It.$$

    Unit of current: ampere, $\text{A}$ ($= \text{C s}^{-1}$). For a changing current, the charge that has flowed in a time is the area under an $I$$t$ graph.

    Worked example. A current of $0.50\ \text{A}$ flows for $2.0$ minutes. Find the charge that passes, and how many electrons this represents. ($e = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.)

    $$Q = It = 0.50 \times 120 = 60\ \text{C}, \qquad N = \frac{Q}{e} = \frac{60}{1.60 \times 10^{-19}} \approx 3.8 \times 10^{20}.$$

    Drift velocity equation

    For a uniform conductor of cross-section area $A$, with $n$ charge carriers per unit volume (the number density 数密度), each carrying charge $q$, moving with average drift velocity 漂移速度 $v$:

    $$I = A n v q.$$
    Two conductors of cross-section A: in (a) positive carriers +q drift the same way as the conventional current I; in (b) electrons -q drift the opposite way to I. Drift velocity v is shown along the axis.
    Charge carriers drifting inside a conductor: positive carriers drift with $I$, electrons against it

    Worked example. A copper wire of cross-sectional area $1.0 \times 10^{-6}\ \text{m}^{2}$ carries a current of $5.0\ \text{A}$. Copper has $n = 8.5 \times 10^{28}$ free electrons per $\text{m}^{3}$. Find the drift velocity. ($e = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.)

    Rearranging $I = Anvq$ gives $v = \dfrac{I}{Anq}$:

    $$v = \frac{5.0}{(1.0 \times 10^{-6})(8.5 \times 10^{28})(1.60 \times 10^{-19})} \approx 3.7 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The electrons drift very slowly — less than a millimetre per second.

    Use this to compare currents:

    • a thinner wire (smaller $A$) at the same $I$ needs a faster drift $v$.
    • a semiconductor has far fewer free carriers than a metal (smaller $n$), so for the same $I$ the drift velocity is much larger.
    • in series 串联 components, $I$ is the same everywhere, so if $A$ stays the same but the material changes, $nv$ changes the other way.
    Explore

    Current, voltage and resistance

    Current is the rate of flow of charge. Raise the voltage and current rises; raise the resistance and it falls — I = V / R.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electric current 电流 diàn liú
    charge carrier 载流子 zài liú zi
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    electrolyte 电解质 diàn jiě zhì
    ion 离子 lí zi
    semiconductor 半导体 bàn dǎo tǐ
    hole 空穴 kōng xué
    conventional current 常规电流 cháng guī diàn liú
    quantised 量子化 liàng zǐ huà
    elementary charge 基本电荷 jī běn diàn hè
    coulomb 库仑 kù lún
    number density 数密度 shù mì dù
    drift velocity 漂移速度 piāo yí sù dù
    series 串联 chuàn lián
    9.2

    Potential difference

    Syllabus
    1. define the potential difference across a component as the energy transferred per unit charge
    2. recall and use $V = W/Q$
    3. recall and use $P = VI$, $P = I^2R$ and $P = V^2/R$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The potential difference 电势差 (p.d.) across a component is the energy 能量 transferred per unit charge as that charge passes through it:

    $$V = \frac{W}{Q}.$$

    Unit: volt 伏特, $\text{V}$ ($= \text{J C}^{-1}$).

    If $1\ \text{J}$ of electrical energy changes into other forms (thermal, light, kinetic, …) when $1\ \text{C}$ of charge passes through a component, the p.d. across it is $1\ \text{V}$.

    The electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) of a source is the energy given per unit charge by the source. The formula is the same as for p.d.; the difference is direction: e.m.f. is energy given to the charge by the source; p.d. is energy given up by the charge to the component.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chà
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    volt 伏特 fú tè
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    9.2

    Electrical power

    High-voltage electricity pylons and power lines
    High-voltage power lines carry electrical energy across the country.

    Combining $V = W/Q$ and $I = Q/t$:

    $$P = \frac{W}{t} = V I.$$

    Using Ohm's law $V = IR$:

    $$P = V I = I^{2} R = \frac{V^{2}}{R}.$$

    Pick the form with the quantities you know. Examples:

    • two heaters of equal resistance — the one with the larger current gives more power 功率 ($P = I^{2}R$).
    • two resistors in parallel 并联 across the same voltage 电压 — the one with smaller $R$ gives more power ($P = V^{2}/R$).
    • a kettle marked "$2.4\ \text{kW}, 240\ \text{V}$" draws $I = P/V = 10\ \text{A}$ and has resistance $R = V^{2}/P = 24\ \Omega$.

    Energy transferred in time $t$ is $E = P t$.

    Explore

    Electrical power

    P = VI

    At a fixed voltage, power is proportional to the current it drives.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    parallel 并联 bìng lián
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    9.3

    Resistance and Ohm's law

    Syllabus
    1. define resistance
    2. recall and use $V = IR$
    3. sketch the $I\text{--}V$ characteristics of a metallic conductor at constant temperature, a semiconductor diode and a filament lamp
    4. explain that the resistance of a filament lamp increases as current increases because its temperature increases
    5. state Ohm's law
    6. recall and use $R = \rho L/A$
    7. understand that the resistance of a light-dependent resistor (LDR) decreases as the light intensity increases
    8. understand that the resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases (it will be assumed that thermistors have a negative temperature coefficient)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The resistance 电阻 $R$ of a component is

    $$R = \frac{V}{I}.$$

    Unit: ohm 欧姆, $\Omega$ ($= \text{V A}^{-1}$). Resistance depends on the conditions (such as temperature) when it is measured.

    Six real fixed resistors in a row on a white background, each a small barrel with metal wire leads and several coloured bands painted around it that code its resistance value
    Real fixed resistors — the coloured bands code the resistance in ohms

    Ohm's law

    A conductor obeys Ohm's law 欧姆定律 when the current through it is proportional to the p.d. across it, as long as the conditions (especially temperature) stay constant. For such a conductor $R$ is constant and the $I$$V$ graph is a straight line through the origin.

    Ohm's law is an experimental result, not a definition. The definition $R = V/I$ works for any component; only ohmic ones have constant $R$.

    $I$$V$ characteristics

    You should be able to sketch these:

    • metal wire at constant temperature — a straight line through the origin (constant $R$). Reversing the p.d. drives the current the other way, giving a straight line in both directions.
    • filament lamp 灯丝灯泡 — through the origin, steep at first, then flatter as $V$ (and $I$) grow. Reason: more current heats the filament, so its resistance rises and the gradient $1/R$ falls.
    • semiconductor diode 二极管 — almost no current for negative $V$ or small positive $V$. Above a "switch-on" voltage (about $0.7\ \text{V}$ for silicon), the current rises sharply.
    I–V graph for an ohmic conductor: a straight line through the origin in both directions, so resistance is constant
    $I$$V$ characteristic of an ohmic conductor (metal wire at constant temperature)
    I–V graph for a filament lamp: an S-shaped curve through the origin, steep near zero and flattening at high voltage as the filament heats and its resistance rises
    $I$$V$ characteristic of a filament lamp
    I–V graph for a diode: current stays near zero in reverse and below the switch-on voltage, then rises sharply above about 0.7 V
    $I$$V$ characteristic of a semiconductor diode

    Resistivity

    For a uniform conductor of length $L$ and cross-section area $A$,

    $$R = \frac{\rho L}{A}.$$

    $\rho$ is the resistivity 电阻率, a property of the material, with unit $\Omega\ \text{m}$. Doubling the length doubles $R$; doubling the area halves it; halving the diameter quarters the area and so makes $R$ four times bigger.

    Worked example. A copper wire of length $2.0\ \text{m}$ and cross-sectional area $1.7 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}^{2}$ has resistivity $1.7 \times 10^{-8}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$. Find its resistance.

    $$R = \frac{\rho L}{A} = \frac{(1.7 \times 10^{-8})(2.0)}{1.7 \times 10^{-7}} = 0.20\ \Omega.$$

    Typical values: copper at room temperature $\rho \sim 1.7 \times 10^{-8}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$; an insulator 绝缘体 $\rho \sim 10^{15}\ \Omega\ \text{m}$ or more.

    Two conductors of equal cross-section A: one of length L with resistance R, one of length 2L with resistance 2R. Resistance is proportional to length.
    A longer conductor has more resistance — doubling $L$ doubles $R$
    Two conductors of equal length L: one of cross-section area A with resistance R, one of area 2A with half the resistance. Resistance is inversely proportional to area.
    A wider conductor has less resistance — doubling $A$ halves $R$

    The resistivity of a metal rises with temperature (more lattice vibration 晶格振动 scatters 散射 the electrons), which is why the filament lamp's $I$$V$ line curves.

    Explore

    What resistance depends on: R = ρL/A

    A longer wire has more resistance; a thicker one (bigger area) has less. Change the length, area and metal.

    Explore

    Resistance (Ohm's law)

    V = R·I

    Ohm's law: voltage is proportional to current — the gradient is the resistance R.

    Explore

    Ohm's law: V = IR

    V = aI

    Drag the resistance. For an ohmic conductor voltage is proportional to current — a straight line whose gradient is the resistance.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    ohm 欧姆 ōu mǔ
    Ohm's law 欧姆定律 ōu mǔ dìng lǜ
    filament lamp 灯丝灯泡 dēng sī dēng pào
    diode 二极管 èr jí guǎn
    resistivity 电阻率 diàn zǔ lǜ
    insulator 绝缘体 jué yuán tǐ
    lattice vibration 晶格振动 jīng gé zhèn dòng
    scatters 散射 sǎn shè
    Exercise sheet
    9.3

    Light-dependent resistor (LDR)

    A light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 (LDR) is a semiconductor whose resistance falls as the light intensity rises. In bright light $R$ may be a few hundred $\Omega$; in the dark it can be in the megaohms. LDRs are used in light-sensing circuits (street lamps, camera light meters). Here the light intensity 光强 controls the resistance.

    Log-log graph: resistance in kilo-ohms on the y-axis falling from 1000 to 0.1 as light intensity in lux rises from 0.1 to 10000
    Resistance of an LDR decreases as light intensity increases
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 guāng mǐn diàn zǔ
    light intensity 光强 guāng qiáng
    9.3

    Thermistor

    In this syllabus a thermistor 热敏电阻 has a negative temperature coefficient 负温度系数: its resistance falls as its temperature rises. This is useful for sensing temperature — put it in a potential divider 分压器 and the output voltage changes with temperature.

    Graph of resistance in ohms versus temperature in degrees Celsius: a steeply falling curve from about 3800 ohms at 0 degrees C down to about 650 ohms at 50 degrees C
    Resistance of a thermistor falls as temperature rises

    This is the opposite of a metal: in a semiconductor, more thermal energy frees more charge carriers, and this matters more than the extra scattering.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thermistor 热敏电阻 rè mǐn diàn zǔ
    negative temperature coefficient 负温度系数 fù wēn dù xì shù
    potential divider 分压器 fēn yā qì
    9.3

    Exam tips

    • Use $I = Q/t$, $V = W/Q$ (energy per unit charge) and $P = VI = I^2 R = V^2/R$.
    • Ohm's law ($V = IR$) applies only to an ohmic conductor at constant temperature — a filament lamp is non-ohmic.
    • Sketch and interpret the $I$-$V$ characteristics of a resistor, filament lamp and diode.
    • An LDR's resistance falls with light; a thermistor's falls as temperature rises.
  • 10 D.C. circuits
    10.1

    Practical circuits

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use the circuit symbols shown in section 6 of this syllabus
    2. draw and interpret circuit diagrams containing the circuit symbols shown in section 6 of this syllabus
    3. define and use the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a source as energy transferred per unit charge in driving charge around a complete circuit
    4. distinguish between e.m.f. and potential difference (p.d.) in terms of energy considerations
    5. understand the effects of the internal resistance of a source of e.m.f. on the terminal potential difference

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An electronics breadboard with components
    A breadboard lets you build and test practical circuits without soldering.

    e.m.f. and p.d.

    The electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) $\varepsilon$ of a source is the energy 能量 given to each unit of charge by the source as it drives the charge around a full circuit. Unit: volt.

    The potential difference 电势差 (p.d.) across a component is the energy changed from electrical to other forms by each unit of charge as it passes through that component.

    Both are in volts; they differ in energy direction:

    • e.m.f. — energy put into the circuit by the source (chemical → electrical in a battery, mechanical → electrical in a generator).
    • p.d. — energy taken out of the electrical form (electrical → thermal in a resistor, → light in a lamp, → kinetic in a motor).

    In the lab you often build a circuit on a breadboard 面包板 (a board with rows of holes that connect components without soldering) and measure currents and p.d.s with a multimeter 万用表.

    A small circuit on a breadboard: a resistor and a glowing red LED are plugged into the rows, wired to a microcontroller, while the red and black probes of a multimeter touch the circuit to take a reading
    A real circuit on a breadboard, being measured with a multimeter

    Internal resistance

    A real source has some internal resistance 内阻 $r$ — usually the resistance of the electrolyte 电解质 in a cell 电池, or the wire windings in a generator. When current $I$ flows, an internal p.d. of $Ir$ is "lost" inside the source, so the terminal p.d. 端电压 across the outside circuit is

    $$V_{\text{terminal}} = \varepsilon - I r.$$

    So:

    • no current (open circuit 开路, $I = 0$): the terminal p.d. equals the e.m.f.
    • larger current: the terminal p.d. falls.
    • short circuit 短路 ($R_{\text{external}} \to 0$): $I = \varepsilon / r$, a large current, with all the energy turned to heat inside the source.

    To measure $r$, change the outside resistance and plot $V_{\text{terminal}}$ against $I$: the line has $y$-intercept $\varepsilon$ and gradient $-r$.

    Worked example. A cell of e.m.f. $1.5\ \text{V}$ and internal resistance $0.50\ \Omega$ is connected to a $2.5\ \Omega$ resistor. Find the current and the terminal p.d.

    The e.m.f. drives the current through both resistances: $I = \dfrac{\varepsilon}{R + r} = \dfrac{1.5}{2.5 + 0.50} = 0.50\ \text{A}$. Then

    $$V_{\text{terminal}} = \varepsilon - Ir = 1.5 - 0.50 \times 0.50 = 1.25\ \text{V}.$$
    A circuit with a cell drawn as e.m.f. E in series with internal resistance r inside a dashed box, connected to a voltmeter across the terminals, an ammeter, and a variable resistor
    Circuit for measuring the e.m.f. and internal resistance of a cell
    A graph of terminal p.d. V against current I: a straight line starting at E on the V-axis and sloping down with gradient minus r
    Terminal p.d. against current — the intercept is the e.m.f. and the gradient is minus the internal resistance

    The power 功率 given to the outside load is $P_{\text{ext}} = (\varepsilon - Ir) I$; the power lost inside is $P_{\text{int}} = I^{2} r$; the total power from the source is $\varepsilon I$.

    Circuit symbols

    You must recognise and draw the standard symbols in the syllabus: cell, battery, switch, resistor, variable resistor, ammeter 电流表, voltmeter 电压表, lamp, diode (and LED 发光二极管), capacitor 电容器, inductor, thermistor, light-dependent resistor, fuse 保险丝, earth, junction. An ideal ammeter has zero resistance 电阻 and goes in series 串联. An ideal voltmeter has infinite resistance and goes in parallel 并联.

    A grid of standard circuit symbols including cell, battery, switch, earth, lamp, fixed and variable resistor, LDR, thermistor, diode, LED, capacitor, inductor, fuse, ammeter, voltmeter, galvanometer, potentiometer, junction and motor
    The standard circuit symbols you need to recognise and draw
    Explore

    Internal resistance

    V = ε − I·r

    Terminal p.d. falls with current: it starts at the e.m.f. ε and drops by I·r.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chà
    breadboard 面包板 miàn bāo bǎn
    multimeter 万用表 wàn yòng biǎo
    internal resistance 内阻 nèi zǔ
    electrolyte 电解质 diàn jiě zhì
    cell 电池 diàn chí
    terminal p.d. 端电压 duān diàn yā
    open circuit 开路 kāi lù
    short circuit 短路 duǎn lù
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    ammeter 电流表 diàn liú biǎo
    voltmeter 电压表 diàn yā biǎo
    LED 发光二极管 fā guāng èr jí guǎn
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    fuse 保险丝 bǎo xiǎn sī
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    series 串联 chuàn lián
    parallel 并联 bìng lián
    10.2

    Kirchhoff's laws

    Syllabus
    1. recall Kirchhoff's first law and understand that it is a consequence of conservation of charge
    2. recall Kirchhoff's second law and understand that it is a consequence of conservation of energy
    3. derive, using Kirchhoff's laws, a formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in series
    4. use the formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in series
    5. derive, using Kirchhoff's laws, a formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in parallel
    6. use the formula for the combined resistance of two or more resistors in parallel
    7. use Kirchhoff's laws to solve simple circuit problems

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    First law (junction rule)

    At any junction 节点, the total current flowing in equals the total current flowing out. This follows from conservation of charge 电荷守恒 — charge cannot build up at a point in a steady circuit, so charge in per second equals charge out per second.

    For a junction with three wires: $I_{1} = I_{2} + I_{3}$ if currents 2 and 3 flow out and current 1 flows in.

    A parallel circuit where a 3 A current from the battery splits at a junction into a 2 A branch and a 1 A branch, then recombines to 3 A
    Current divides at a junction in a parallel circuit (3 A in equals 2 A plus 1 A)

    Second law (loop rule)

    Around any closed loop 回路, the total e.m.f. equals the total p.d. across the components in that loop. This follows from conservation of energy 能量守恒: as a unit of charge goes once round a loop, the energy it gains from sources equals the energy it gives up to components.

    Pick a direction round the loop. Take an e.m.f. as positive when the loop direction goes from − to + of the source, and a p.d. as positive when the loop direction is the conventional current direction through the resistor.

    Combining resistors

    Resistors in series carry the same current; the total p.d. is the sum:

    $$\varepsilon = I R_{1} + I R_{2} + \ldots = I (R_{1} + R_{2} + \ldots),$$

    so $R_{\text{series}} = R_{1} + R_{2} + \ldots$.

    Two resistors R1 and R2 in series carrying the same current I, with p.d.s V1 and V2, shown as equivalent to a single resistor R with p.d. V
    Two resistors in series and their single equivalent resistor

    Resistors in parallel have the same p.d.; the total current is the sum:

    $$I = \frac{V}{R_{1}} + \frac{V}{R_{2}} + \ldots = V \left(\frac{1}{R_{1}} + \frac{1}{R_{2}} + \ldots\right),$$

    so $\dfrac{1}{R_{\text{parallel}}} = \dfrac{1}{R_{1}} + \dfrac{1}{R_{2}} + \ldots$.

    Two resistors R1 and R2 in parallel sharing the current I as I1 and I2 across the same p.d. V, shown as equivalent to a single resistor R
    Two resistors in parallel and their single equivalent resistor

    Two equal resistors $R$ in parallel give $R/2$; $N$ equal ones give $R/N$. A parallel combination is always smaller than any of its resistors; a series combination is always larger.

    Worked example. A $4.0\ \Omega$ resistor and a $12\ \Omega$ resistor are connected in parallel. Find their combined resistance.

    $$\frac{1}{R} = \frac{1}{4.0} + \frac{1}{12} = \frac{3}{12} + \frac{1}{12} = \frac{4}{12} = \frac{1}{3} \quad\Rightarrow\quad R = 3.0\ \Omega.$$

    Solving a circuit

    1. Label every current with a symbol and a chosen direction.
    2. Use Kirchhoff's first law 基尔霍夫第一定律 at each junction to link the currents.
    3. Use Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 around each loop to get equations in the p.d.s.
    4. Use $V = IR$ for each resistor.
    5. Solve the equations together.

    For symmetric resistor networks, use the symmetry to spot branches with equal currents — the branch with the most current gives the most power ($P = I^{2}R$).

    Explore

    Series & parallel circuits

    Switch between series and parallel and add bulbs. In series they share the voltage and one break kills them all; in parallel each gets the full voltage and a break only loses its branch.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    junction 节点 jié diǎn
    conservation of charge 电荷守恒 diàn hè shǒu héng
    loop 回路 huí lù
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    Kirchhoff's first law 基尔霍夫第一定律 jī ěr huò fū dì yí dìng lǜ
    Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 jī ěr huò fū dì èr dìng lǜ
    10.3

    Potential dividers

    Syllabus
    1. understand the principle of a potential divider circuit
    2. recall and use the principle of the potentiometer as a means of comparing potential differences
    3. understand the use of a galvanometer in null methods
    4. explain the use of thermistors and light-dependent resistors in potential dividers to provide a potential difference that is dependent on temperature and light intensity

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A potential divider 分压器 is two (or more) resistors in series across a source. The p.d. across each resistor is in direct proportion to its resistance:

    $$V_{1} = V_{\text{in}} \cdot \frac{R_{1}}{R_{1} + R_{2}}, \qquad V_{2} = V_{\text{in}} \cdot \frac{R_{2}}{R_{1} + R_{2}}.$$

    The output (tapped between $R_{1}$ and $R_{2}$) can be set to any voltage 电压 between $0$ and $V_{\text{in}}$ by choosing the resistances. A rheostat 变阻器 (a slider on a uniform-resistance wire) gives a smoothly variable divider.

    Worked example. A $6.0\ \text{V}$ supply is connected across a $2.0\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor in series with a $4.0\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor. Find the output voltage tapped across the $4.0\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor.

    $$V_{2} = V_{\text{in}} \cdot \frac{R_{2}}{R_{1} + R_{2}} = 6.0 \times \frac{4.0}{2.0 + 4.0} = 4.0\ \text{V}.$$
    A potential divider: a source drives current I through R1 and R2 in series, with the total p.d. V split into V1 across R1 and V2 across R2, the output tapped across R2
    A potential divider — the p.d. splits between R1 and R2 in proportion to their resistances

    Sensor circuits

    Replace one fixed resistor with a sensor 传感器 whose resistance changes with a physical quantity:

    • thermistor 热敏电阻 (NTC): $R$ falls as temperature rises. In a divider, the output voltage changes with temperature in a fixed direction.
    • light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 (LDR): $R$ falls as light intensity 光强 rises, giving a brightness-dependent output.

    Connect the output to a transistor 晶体管 base or a comparator 比较器 to switch a load on or off when the temperature or light passes a threshold 阈值.

    A potential divider with a fixed resistor R in series with a thermistor S across a cell of e.m.f. E, the output voltage V taken across the thermistor
    A thermistor in a potential divider gives an output voltage that changes with temperature

    Potentiometer and the null method

    A potentiometer 电位差计 is a uniform resistance wire of length $L_{0}$ with a sliding contact (jockey 滑动触头). The resistance per unit length is uniform, so the p.d. from one end to the jockey is proportional to the length:

    $$V_{x} = V_{\text{full}} \cdot \frac{x}{L_{0}}.$$

    To compare two e.m.f.s (an unknown cell against a standard cell), connect each in turn with the jockey through a galvanometer 检流计. Slide the jockey until the galvanometer reads zero (a null — no current flows through the cell being measured, because the potentiometer's voltage there exactly opposes the cell's e.m.f.). The two balance lengths are in the ratio of the e.m.f.s:

    $$\frac{\varepsilon_{1}}{\varepsilon_{2}} = \frac{l_{1}}{l_{2}}.$$

    This is a null method 零点法: you find the balance (zero current) instead of measuring a current's value. Its advantage is that at balance the unknown cell gives no current, so its internal resistance does not affect the result.

    A potentiometer circuit: a driver cell sends current along a uniform wire; a two-way switch selects cell E_A or E_B, each connected through a galvanometer to a sliding contact, balanced at length l_A
    A potentiometer comparing two cell e.m.f.s by the null method
    Explore

    Sharing voltage in series

    In a series loop the same current flows everywhere and the cell's voltage splits across the components — that split is how a potential divider works.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    potential divider 分压器 fēn yā qì
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    rheostat 变阻器 biàn zǔ qì
    sensor 传感器 chuán gǎn qì
    thermistor 热敏电阻 rè mǐn diàn zǔ
    light-dependent resistor 光敏电阻 guāng mǐn diàn zǔ
    light intensity 光强 guāng qiáng
    transistor 晶体管 jīng tǐ guǎn
    comparator 比较器 bǐ jiào qì
    threshold 阈值 yù zhí
    potentiometer 电位差计 diàn wèi chà jì
    jockey 滑动触头 huá dòng chù tóu
    galvanometer 检流计 jiǎn liú jì
    null method 零点法 líng diǎn fǎ
    10.3

    Exam tips

    • Apply Kirchhoff's laws: current into a junction $=$ current out (charge conserved); $\sum \text{e.m.f.} = \sum \text{p.d.}$ round a loop (energy conserved).
    • Combine resistors: series $R = R_1 + R_2$; parallel $1/R = 1/R_1 + 1/R_2$.
    • A potential divider splits voltage in the ratio of the resistances.
    • Include internal resistance: $\text{e.m.f.} = I(R + r)$ — the "lost volts" are $Ir$.
  • 11 Particle physics
    11.1

    The nuclear atom

    Syllabus
    1. infer from the results of the $\alpha$-particle scattering experiment the existence and small size of the nucleus
    2. describe a simple model for the nuclear atom to include protons, neutrons and orbital electrons
    3. distinguish between nucleon number and proton number
    4. understand that isotopes are forms of the same element with different numbers of neutrons in their nuclei
    5. understand and use the notation $_Z^A\text{X}$ for the representation of nuclides
    6. understand that nucleon number and charge are conserved in nuclear processes
    7. describe the composition, mass and charge of $\alpha$-, $\beta$- and $\gamma$-radiations (both $\beta^-$ (electrons) and $\beta^+$ (positrons) are included)
    8. understand that an antiparticle has the same mass but opposite charge to the corresponding particle, and that a positron is the antiparticle of an electron
    9. state that (electron) antineutrinos are produced during $\beta^-$ decay and (electron) neutrinos are produced during $\beta^+$ decay
    10. understand that $\alpha$-particles have discrete energies but that $\beta$-particles have a continuous range of energies because (anti)neutrinos are emitted in $\beta$-decay
    11. represent $\alpha$- and $\beta$-decay by a radioactive decay equation of the form $^{238}_{92}\text{U} \rightarrow ^{234}_{90}\text{Th} + ^4_2\alpha$
    12. use the unified atomic mass unit (u) as a unit of mass

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Geiger–Marsden α-particle scattering

    Alpha particles α粒子 fired at a thin gold foil were seen to:

    • mostly pass straight through, with very little deflection 偏转,
    • sometimes deflect through small angles,
    • rarely (about $1$ in $8000$) deflect through angles greater than $90°$.

    From this Rutherford worked out:

    • the atom is mostly empty space (most α-particles pass straight through),
    • there is a tiny, dense, positively charged nucleus 原子核 at the centre (the rare large deflections need a concentrated charge to push the α away),
    • almost all of the atom's mass is in this nucleus.

    Order of magnitude: atom diameter $\sim 10^{-10}\ \text{m}$, nucleus diameter $\sim 10^{-15}\ \text{m}$ — the nucleus is about $10^{5}$ times smaller than the atom.

    The alpha-scattering apparatus: an alpha source and a thin gold foil inside an evacuated chamber, with a zinc sulfide detector on a microscope that can be moved round to different angles
    The $\alpha$-scattering experiment — $\alpha$-particles strike a thin gold foil in a vacuum
    Paths of alpha particles near a tiny dense nucleus: most pass almost straight through, some are deflected through small angles, and a rare one approaching head-on is scattered back at its closest approach
    Most $\alpha$-particles pass nearly straight through; a few are deflected sharply by the tiny nucleus

    Simple nuclear model

    An atom has:

    • a central nucleus of protons 质子 (positive, charge $+e$) and neutrons 中子 (no charge),
    • electrons 电子 (charge $-e$) around the nucleus.

    The proton and neutron have almost the same mass ($\approx 1\ \text{u}$); the electron is about $\tfrac{1}{1836}$ of the proton's mass.

    Two atom models: a) a helium atom with two protons and two neutrons in the nucleus and two electrons on one shell, b) a lithium atom with three protons and four neutrons and electrons on two shells (two inner, one outer)
    Simple models of a helium atom and a lithium atom (not to scale)

    Notation and key numbers

    For a nuclide 核素 written $^{A}_{Z}\text{X}$:

    Nuclide notation: the top number is the nucleon number A, the bottom is the proton number Z
    Nuclide notation: nucleon number on top, proton number below
    • proton number 质子数 $Z$ (also the atomic number): the number of protons. It fixes the element.
    • nucleon number 核子数 $A$ (also the mass number): the total number of nucleons 核子 (protons + neutrons).
    • number of neutrons $N = A - Z$.

    A neutral atom has the same number of electrons as protons.

    Isotopes

    Isotopes 同位素 are atoms of the same element (same $Z$) with different numbers of neutrons (different $A$). They behave the same chemically but differently in the nucleus. Example: $^{12}_{6}\text{C}$ and $^{14}_{6}\text{C}$ are isotopes of carbon.

    Conservation laws in nuclear processes

    In any nuclear process:

    • nucleon number $A$ is conserved (total $A$ before $=$ total $A$ after),
    • charge is conserved (this is conservation of charge 电荷守恒).

    These two rules let you balance decay and reaction equations.

    Unified atomic mass unit

    The unified atomic mass unit 统一原子质量单位, symbol $\text{u}$, is set so that an atom of $^{12}_{6}\text{C}$ has mass exactly $12\ \text{u}$. Numerically,

    $$1\ \text{u} = 1.661 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}.$$

    A proton has mass $\approx 1.007\ \text{u}$; a neutron $\approx 1.009\ \text{u}$; an electron $\approx 5.5 \times 10^{-4}\ \text{u}$.

    Explore

    Nuclear atom evidence lab

    Connect observations to the nuclear model of the atom.

    Explore

    Radioactive decay

    A = A₀·b

    Activity decays exponentially — set the base b below 1.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alpha particle α粒子 α lì zi
    deflection 偏转 piān zhuǎn
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    neutron 中子 zhōng zi
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    nuclide 核素 hé sù
    proton number 质子数 zhì zi shù
    nucleon number 核子数 hé zǐ shù
    nucleon 核子 hé zǐ
    isotope 同位素 tóng wèi sù
    conservation of charge 电荷守恒 diàn hè shǒu héng
    unified atomic mass unit 统一原子质量单位 tǒng yī yuán zi zhì liàng dān wèi
    11.1

    Radioactive emissions

    An unstable nucleus rearranges itself and gives out one of three kinds of radiation 辐射. This is radioactive 放射性 decay. Each kind has its own properties.

    α-radiation

    • Made of: a helium-4 nucleus, $^{4}_{2}\alpha$ (two protons + two neutrons).
    • Mass: $\approx 4\ \text{u}$.
    • Charge: $+2e$.
    • Range in air: a few cm. Stopped by a sheet of paper.
    • Ionising power: strong — it is good at ionising 电离.
    • Energy spectrum: discrete 分立 (one decay gives α-particles at one or a few sharp energies).

    A cloud chamber 云室 makes the tracks visible: each α-particle leaves a short, straight, thick trail of tiny droplets as it ionises the air. The short equal lengths show the α-particles all carry about the same energy.

    A cloud chamber photograph: short, straight, thick white trails of vapour fan out from a small radioactive source, marking the paths of alpha particles through the cold gas
    Alpha-particle tracks in a cloud chamber, fanning out from an americium-241 source

    β-radiation

    Two types of beta particle β粒子:

    • $\beta^{-}$: a fast electron, given out when a neutron turns into a proton.
    • $\beta^{+}$: a positron 正电子 (the electron's antiparticle), given out when a proton in a proton-rich nucleus turns into a neutron.

    Properties (both types):

    • Mass: $\approx 1/1836\ \text{u}$ (much less than α).
    • Charge: $-e$ for $\beta^{-}$, $+e$ for $\beta^{+}$.
    • Range in air: about $1\ \text{m}$. Stopped by a few mm of aluminium.
    • Energy spectrum: continuous 连续 up to a maximum (see below).

    γ-radiation

    • Made of: a high-energy photon 光子 — part of the electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱.
    • Mass: zero (rest mass).
    • Charge: zero.
    • Range in air: large (follows the inverse-square law). Strongly attenuated 衰减 by several cm of lead or about a metre of concrete.
    • Ionising power: weakest.
    • Energy spectrum: discrete (a gamma ray γ射线 is given out as the nucleus drops between two nuclear energy levels).

    A nucleus often gives out a γ-photon as a "tidy-up" step after an α or β decay leaves the daughter nucleus 子核 in an excited state 激发态.

    Penetrating power: an alpha beam is stopped by paper, a beta beam by a few mm of aluminium, and a gamma beam is only attenuated by thick lead
    Penetrating power: $\alpha$ is stopped by paper, $\beta$ by aluminium, $\gamma$ only attenuated by lead

    Antiparticles, neutrinos and antineutrinos

    Every particle has an antiparticle 反粒子 with the same mass but opposite charge. The positron is the antiparticle of the electron.

    In β-decay, a third particle is always given out as well:

    • $\beta^{-}$ decay: an antineutrino 反中微子 $\bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}$.
    • $\beta^{+}$ decay: a neutrino 中微子 $\nu_{\text{e}}$.

    Neutrinos and antineutrinos have zero charge, very small mass, and barely interact — they are very hard to detect, but they must be there to balance energy, momentum 动量 and other conserved quantities in β-decay.

    Why β has a continuous spectrum (and α does not)

    In α-decay the energy 能量 released is shared between just two particles (the daughter nucleus and the α). Conservation of momentum and energy then fixes the α's energy to one value (discrete).

    In β-decay the energy is shared between three particles (the daughter nucleus, the β, and the (anti)neutrino). The β can take any share from zero up to a maximum, so its energy spectrum is continuous.

    Writing decay equations

    A general α-decay:

    $$^{A}_{Z}\text{X} \to {}^{A-4}_{Z-2}\text{Y} + {}^{4}_{2}\alpha$$

    (check: $A = (A-4) + 4$, $Z = (Z-2) + 2$.)

    A general $\beta^{-}$ decay:

    $$^{A}_{Z}\text{X} \to {}^{A}_{Z+1}\text{Y} + {}^{0}_{-1}\beta + \bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}.$$

    A general $\beta^{+}$ decay:

    $$^{A}_{Z}\text{X} \to {}^{A}_{Z-1}\text{Y} + {}^{0}_{+1}\beta + \nu_{\text{e}}.$$

    Worked example. Uranium-238, $^{238}_{92}\text{U}$, decays by α-emission; carbon-14, $^{14}_{6}\text{C}$, decays by $\beta^{-}$-emission. Find each daughter nuclide.

    α-decay lowers $A$ by 4 and $Z$ by 2; $\beta^{-}$-decay leaves $A$ unchanged and raises $Z$ by 1:

    $$^{238}_{92}\text{U} \to {}^{234}_{90}\text{Th} + {}^{4}_{2}\alpha, \qquad {}^{14}_{6}\text{C} \to {}^{14}_{7}\text{N} + {}^{0}_{-1}\beta + \bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}.$$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    radiation 辐射 fú shè
    radioactive 放射性 fàng shè xìng
    ionising 电离 diàn lí
    discrete 分立 fēn lì
    cloud chamber 云室 yún shì
    beta particle β粒子 β lì zi
    positron 正电子 zhèng diàn zi
    continuous 连续 lián xù
    photon 光子 guāng zi
    electromagnetic spectrum 电磁波谱 diàn cí bō pǔ
    attenuated 衰减 shuāi jiǎn
    gamma ray γ射线 γ shè xiàn
    daughter nucleus 子核 zi hé
    excited state 激发态 jī fā tài
    antiparticle 反粒子 fǎn lì zi
    antineutrino 反中微子 fǎn zhōng wēi zi
    neutrino 中微子 zhōng wēi zi
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    11.2

    Fundamental particles

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a quark is a fundamental particle and that there are six flavours (types) of quark: up, down, strange, charm, top and bottom
    2. recall and use the charge of each flavour of quark and understand that its respective antiquark has the opposite charge (no knowledge of any other properties of quarks is required)
    3. recall that protons and neutrons are not fundamental particles and describe protons and neutrons in terms of their quark composition
    4. understand that a hadron may be either a baryon (consisting of three quarks) or a meson (consisting of one quark and one antiquark)
    5. describe the changes to quark composition that take place during $\beta^-$ and $\beta^+$ decay
    6. recall that electrons and neutrinos are fundamental particles called leptons

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Tracks of particles in a bubble chamber
    A bubble chamber reveals the curved tracks of charged particles.

    Some particles are fundamental 基本粒子 (point-like, with no smaller parts as far as we know); others are built from fundamental ones.

    Quarks

    A quark 夸克 is a fundamental particle. There are six flavours:

    • up (u), charge $+\tfrac{2}{3}e$,
    • down (d), charge $-\tfrac{1}{3}e$,
    • charm (c), charge $+\tfrac{2}{3}e$,
    • strange (s), charge $-\tfrac{1}{3}e$,
    • top (t), charge $+\tfrac{2}{3}e$,
    • bottom (b), charge $-\tfrac{1}{3}e$.

    Each quark has an antiquark 反夸克 with the same size of charge but the opposite sign: $\bar{u}$ (charge $-\tfrac{2}{3}e$), $\bar{d}$ (charge $+\tfrac{1}{3}e$). No other quark property is tested.

    The six quark flavours by charge: up, charm and top each carry +2/3 e; down, strange and bottom each carry -1/3 e; each antiquark has the opposite charge
    The six quarks: up/charm/top carry $+\tfrac23 e$, down/strange/bottom carry $-\tfrac13 e$

    Hadrons: baryons and mesons

    Particles built from quarks are hadrons 强子. Two types:

    • baryons 重子 — three quarks. Examples: proton (u u d), neutron (u d d). Charge check: $\tfrac{2}{3} + \tfrac{2}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} = +1$ for the proton; $\tfrac{2}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} - \tfrac{1}{3} = 0$ for the neutron.
    • mesons 介子 — one quark and one antiquark (for example $\pi^{+}$ is u$\bar{\text{d}}$).

    Protons and neutrons are not fundamental — they are baryons made of quarks.

    Quark changes in β-decay

    In $\beta^{-}$ decay a neutron turns into a proton; in quark terms, one down quark turns into an up quark:

    $$\text{d} \to \text{u} + \beta^{-} + \bar{\nu}_{\text{e}}.$$

    In $\beta^{+}$ decay a proton turns into a neutron; one up quark turns into a down quark:

    $$\text{u} \to \text{d} + \beta^{+} + \nu_{\text{e}}.$$
    Beta-minus decay at the quark level: a neutron (u d d) becomes a proton (u u d) as one down quark turns into an up quark, emitting a beta-minus particle and an electron antineutrino
    Beta-minus decay: one down quark becomes an up quark, turning a neutron into a proton

    Leptons

    Leptons 轻子 are fundamental particles that are not made of quarks. Electrons and neutrinos are leptons. (Heavier leptons — the muon and tau — are not needed for this syllabus.)

    Classifying particles

    To answer "which are fundamental?": quarks and leptons (electrons, positrons, neutrinos, antineutrinos) are fundamental; protons, neutrons, baryons, mesons and hadrons are not — they are built from quarks.

    A tree classifying particles into fundamental ones (quarks and leptons such as the electron and neutrino) and hadrons made of quarks (baryons like the proton and neutron, and mesons)
    Fundamental particles (quarks, leptons) versus hadrons (baryons, mesons)
    Explore

    Fundamental particle lab

    Sort particles by the family or interaction that defines them.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    fundamental 基本粒子 jī běn lì zi
    quark 夸克 kuā kè
    flavours wèi
    antiquark 反夸克 fǎn kuā kè
    hadrons 强子 qiáng zi
    baryons 重子 zhòng zǐ
    mesons 介子 jiè zi
    leptons 轻子 qīng zi
    11.2

    Exam tips

    • Describe the nuclear atom (a small, dense, positive nucleus) using the alpha-scattering evidence.
    • Compare $\alpha$, $\beta$ and $\gamma$ by charge, mass, ionising power and penetration.
    • Use quark composition (proton $uud$, neutron $udd$) and check that charge and nucleon number balance in an equation.
    • In $\beta^-$ decay a neutron becomes a proton, an electron and an antineutrino.
  • 12 Motion in a circle
    12.1

    Angles in radians

    Syllabus
    1. define the radian and express angular displacement in radians
    2. understand and use the concept of angular speed
    3. recall and use $\omega = 2\pi / T$ and $v = r\omega$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Uniform circular motion: velocity & acceleration

    The radian 弧度 is the angle made at the centre of a circle by an arc whose length equals the radius. For an arc of length $s$ on a circle of radius $r$, the angle in radians is

    $$\theta = \frac{s}{r}.$$

    Radians have no unit (a ratio of lengths). A full circle has $s = 2\pi r$, so $\theta = 2\pi\ \text{rad}$. A half-circle is $\pi\ \text{rad}$; a quarter is $\pi/2\ \text{rad}$.

    A circle with a shaded sector; the two bounding radii each have length r and the arc has length s = r, so the angle at the centre is one radian
    One radian is the angle whose arc length equals the radius

    To convert: $1\ \text{rad} = 180°/\pi \approx 57.3°$. Set your calculator to radians for this topic; "degree" mode will give wrong answers.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    radian 弧度 hú dù
    arc
    12.1

    Uniform circular motion: angular speed

    A spinning fairground ride lit up at night
    A spinning fairground ride: every rider turns through the same angle each second.

    An object moves in a circle of radius $r$ at constant speed $v$. Define:

    • angular displacement 角位移 $\theta$ — the angle (in radians) turned through by the radius from a chosen start line.
    • angular speed 角速度 $\omega$ — the rate of change of angular displacement.

    For uniform motion $\omega$ is constant and

    $$\omega = \frac{\theta}{t}.$$

    Unit: $\text{rad s}^{-1}$.

    Period and frequency

    If the object goes once round ($2\pi\ \text{rad}$, one revolution) in time $T$ (the period 周期), then

    $$\omega = \frac{2\pi}{T} = 2\pi f,$$

    where $f = 1/T$ is the frequency 频率 of turning (Hz).

    Linear and angular speed

    In one period $T$ the object travels a distance $2\pi r$ (the circumference 周长) at constant speed, so

    $$v = \frac{2\pi r}{T} = r \omega.$$

    This links the linear (tangential 切向) speed $v$ with the angular speed $\omega$. At a larger radius (for the same angular speed) the linear speed is larger — a child on the edge of a merry-go-round moves faster than one near the centre, even though both go round once in the same time.

    A turntable with two riders sharing the same angular speed; the inner rider has a short velocity arrow and the outer rider a long one, because v equals r times omega
    Same angular speed, but the rider at the larger radius has the larger linear speed ($v = r\omega$)

    Worked example. A fairground ride of radius $4.0\ \text{m}$ completes one turn every $8.0\ \text{s}$. Find its angular speed and the linear speed of a rider on the edge.

    $$\omega = \frac{2\pi}{T} = \frac{2\pi}{8.0} = 0.79\ \text{rad s}^{-1}, \qquad v = r\omega = 4.0 \times 0.79 = 3.1\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$
    An object moving round a circle of radius r; as the radius sweeps through an angle the object moves along an arc, and its velocity v points along the tangent
    As the radius turns through $\Delta\theta$ the object moves an arc $\Delta s$ at speed $v$
    Explore

    Angular speed

    s = rθ

    Angular speed turns angle per time; arc length s = rθ.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    angular displacement 角位移 jiǎo wèi yí
    angular speed 角速度 jiǎo sù dù
    revolution quān
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    circumference 周长 zhōu cháng
    tangential 切向 qiè xiàng
    12.2

    Centripetal acceleration

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a force of constant magnitude that is always perpendicular to the direction of motion causes centripetal acceleration
    2. understand that centripetal acceleration causes circular motion with a constant angular speed
    3. recall and use $a = r\omega^2$ and $a = v^2 / r$
    4. recall and use $F = mr\omega^2$ and $F = mv^2 / r$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An object moving in a circle at constant speed still has a changing velocity 速度 — its direction keeps changing, even though its size stays the same. A changing velocity needs an acceleration 加速度. This acceleration points towards the centre and is the centripetal acceleration 向心加速度.

    Size

    $$a = \frac{v^{2}}{r} = r\omega^{2}.$$

    The two forms are equal because $v = r\omega$. Pick the one with the quantities you have.

    The centripetal acceleration is perpendicular 垂直 to the velocity at every instant — never along the direction of motion. (If part of it were along the motion, the speed would change.) Unit: $\text{m s}^{-2}$.

    A ball moving along a circular path: its velocity points along the tangent while the force and acceleration point inwards towards the centre
    The velocity points along the tangent; the force and acceleration point to the centre
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    centripetal acceleration 向心加速度 xiàng xīn jiā sù dù
    perpendicular 垂直 chuí zhí
    12.2

    Centripetal force

    A large Ferris wheel
    A Ferris wheel: a centripetal force toward the centre keeps each car moving in a circle.

    By Newton's second law, the resultant force on a body in circular motion at constant speed is

    $$F = m a = \frac{m v^{2}}{r} = m r \omega^{2}.$$

    This is the centripetal force 向心力. It always points towards the centre — perpendicular to the velocity.

    The centripetal force is not a new kind of force — it is the net result of the real forces acting (tension, gravity, friction, electric attraction, normal contact force, …). In a problem, work out which real force(s) provide it.

    Worked example. A $0.20\ \text{kg}$ ball on a string is whirled in a horizontal circle of radius $0.50\ \text{m}$ at $3.0\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the centripetal force (the tension in the string).

    $$F = \frac{mv^{2}}{r} = \frac{0.20 \times 3.0^{2}}{0.50} = 3.6\ \text{N}.$$

    Where the centripetal force comes from

    • Ball on a string in a horizontal circle: the tension 张力 in the string.
    • Car turning a flat corner: the friction 摩擦力 between tyres and road ($F = m v^{2}/r$). If the car goes too fast, friction is not enough and it skids outwards.
    • Banked corner 倾斜 (no friction): the horizontal part of the normal contact force 支持力; $\tan\theta = v^{2}/(rg)$ for the angle that needs no friction.
    • Planet or satellite 卫星 in orbit 轨道: the gravitational attraction 引力, $G M m / r^{2} = m v^{2}/r$.
    • Electron 电子 in a circular orbit (Bohr-style model): the electrostatic 静电 attraction between the electron and the positive nucleus 原子核:
    $$\frac{kZe^{2}}{r^{2}} = \frac{m_{e} v^{2}}{r},$$

    where $k = 1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0})$ and $Z$ is the nuclear charge. Solve for $v$ to get the orbital speed; then $T = 2\pi r/v$.

    A car on a banked track; the normal contact force F of the road on the car resolves into a vertical part F_v balancing the weight and a horizontal part F_h pointing to the centre of the circle
    On a banked track the horizontal part of the road's force provides the centripetal force

    Vertical circles

    When the circle is upright, the speed is not constant (gravity does work) — but at each instant the net force towards the centre still equals $m v^{2}/r$:

    • at the bottom of a loop: tension up, weight 重力 down, so $T - mg = m v^{2}/r$ — the tension is largest here.
    • at the top of a loop: tension and weight both point down (towards the centre), so $T + mg = m v^{2}/r$ — the tension is smallest. For the slowest speed at the top with the string just tight, set $T = 0$: $mg = m v_{\text{min}}^{2}/r$, giving $v_{\text{min}} = \sqrt{gr}$.
    An object on a circular ride drawn at the top and bottom of the loop; at the top the weight W and normal contact force R_t both point down, at the bottom the normal contact force R_b points up and the weight W points down
    Forces on a person at the top and bottom of a vertical circle

    Worked example. A car goes round a vertical loop of radius $2.0\ \text{m}$. Find the minimum speed at the top for the car to keep contact with the track (take $g = 9.81\ \text{m s}^{-2}$).

    At the slowest speed the track force is zero, so gravity alone provides the centripetal force: $mg = m v_{\text{min}}^{2}/r$, giving $v_{\text{min}} = \sqrt{gr}$:

    $$v_{\text{min}} = \sqrt{9.81 \times 2.0} \approx 4.4\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The constant-speed result ($v = r\omega$, $\omega$ constant) holds for horizontal circles, or where the force only bends the path (orbits in gravity, charges in a magnetic field 磁场).

    Explore

    Centripetal force and speed

    F = mv²/r

    For circular motion the force needed grows with the square of the speed — double v, four times the force.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    force
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    tension 张力 zhāng lì
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    banked 倾斜 qīng xié
    normal contact force 支持力 zhī chí lì
    satellite 卫星 wèi xīng
    orbit 轨道 guǐ dào
    gravitational attraction 引力 yǐn lì
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    electrostatic 静电 jìng diàn
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    weight 重力 zhòng lì
    magnetic field 磁场 cí chǎng
    12.2

    How to structure a circular-motion answer

    1. Find the radius $r$ and choose $v$ or $\omega$. Use $v = r\omega$ to switch between them.
    2. Find the centripetal acceleration with $a = v^{2}/r$ or $r\omega^{2}$.
    3. List the real forces and write Newton's second law in the radial 径向 direction (towards the centre is positive). Set the net inward force equal to $m v^{2}/r$.
    4. For period or frequency: use $\omega = 2\pi/T$, or $T = 2\pi r / v$.
    5. Check the directions: centripetal force and acceleration point to the centre; the velocity is along the tangent.
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    radial 径向 jìng xiàng
    12.2

    Exam tips

    • Work in radians; angular speed $\omega = 2\pi/T = v/r$.
    • Centripetal acceleration $a = v^2/r = \omega^2 r$; the net force acts towards the centre — it is provided by tension/gravity/friction, not an extra force.
    • Always state what provides the centripetal force in the situation given.
  • 13 Gravitational fields
    13.1

    Gravitational fields

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a gravitational field is an example of a field of force and define gravitational field as force per unit mass
    2. represent a gravitational field by means of field lines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Definition

    A gravitational field 重力场 is a region where a mass 质量 feels a force from other masses. The gravitational field strength 重力场强度 $g$ at a point is the gravitational force per unit mass on a small test mass 检验质量 placed there:

    $$g = \frac{F}{m}.$$

    Unit: $\text{N kg}^{-1}$ (the same as $\text{m s}^{-2}$ — the acceleration of free fall in the field). $g$ is a vector 矢量, pointing the way the force acts — towards the source mass.

    Field lines

    A gravitational field is drawn with field lines 场线 that point the way the force acts on a test mass:

    • around a point mass 质点 or a uniform sphere (treated as a point mass from outside), the field lines are radial 径向, pointing inwards.
    • near the Earth's surface over a small area, the field lines are nearly parallel and equally spaced, pointing straight down — a uniform field 匀强场.

    Closer lines mean a stronger field.

    Three sets of gravitational field lines: equally spaced parallel lines for constant field strength, lines spreading apart for decreasing strength, and lines converging for increasing strength
    Field-line spacing shows the field strength — closer lines mean a stronger field
    Explore

    A radial field

    Change the mass. The field lines point inward and get denser close in, where the field is stronger — a radial field around a point mass.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gravitational field 重力场 zhòng lì chǎng
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    force
    gravitational field strength 重力场强度 zhòng lì chǎng qiáng dù
    test mass 检验质量 jiǎn yàn zhì liàng
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    field line 场线 chǎng xiàn
    point mass 质点 zhì diǎn
    radial 径向 jìng xiàng
    uniform field 匀强场 yún qiáng chǎng
    13.2 13.3

    Newton's law of gravitation

    Syllabus
    1. understand that, for a point outside a uniform sphere, the mass of the sphere may be considered to be a point mass at its centre
    2. recall and use Newton's law of gravitation $F = Gm_1m_2 / r^2$ for the force between two point masses
    3. analyse circular orbits in gravitational fields by relating the gravitational force to the centripetal acceleration it causes
    4. understand that a satellite in a geostationary orbit remains at the same point above the Earth's surface, with an orbital period of 24 hours, orbiting from west to east, directly above the Equator
    1. derive, from Newton's law of gravitation and the definition of gravitational field, the equation $g = GM/r^2$ for the gravitational field strength due to a point mass
    2. recall and use $g = GM/r^2$
    3. understand why $g$ is approximately constant for small changes in height near the Earth's surface

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    For two point masses $m_{1}, m_{2}$ a distance $r$ apart, the force on each is

    Two masses pull on each other along the line joining them
    Two masses attract along the line joining them
    $$F = \frac{G m_{1} m_{2}}{r^{2}},$$

    pulling them together along the line joining them. This is Newton's law of gravitation 万有引力定律. The constant $G = 6.67 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{kg}^{-2}$ is the universal gravitational constant 万有引力常量.

    Spheres treated as point masses

    For a uniform sphere (such as a planet or star), the field at any point outside is the same as that of a point mass equal to the total mass at the centre. So from above the surface, you can treat the Earth as a point mass at its centre. (Points inside a sphere are different, and are not in the syllabus.)

    Radial gravitational field lines pointing inwards towards a point mass, and the identical pattern of inward radial lines around a uniform sphere
    Outside a uniform sphere the field is radial, exactly like a point mass at the centre

    Field strength from a point mass

    Put the gravitational force on a test mass $m$ at distance $r$ from a point mass $M$ into $g = F/m$:

    $$F = \frac{G M m}{r^{2}}, \qquad g = \frac{G M}{r^{2}}.$$

    So $g$ falls off as $1/r^{2}$ as you move away from the source.

    A graph of gravitational field strength g against distance r: g equals GM over r squared, so it is large near the surface r = R and falls off as one over r squared with distance
    Field strength falls off as $1/r^2$ with distance from a point mass

    Worked example. Find the gravitational field strength at the Earth's surface. (Earth's mass $M = 6.0 \times 10^{24}\ \text{kg}$, radius $R = 6.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$, $G = 6.67 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{kg}^{-2}$.)

    $$g = \frac{GM}{R^{2}} = \frac{(6.67 \times 10^{-11})(6.0 \times 10^{24})}{(6.4 \times 10^{6})^{2}} \approx 9.8\ \text{N kg}^{-1}.$$

    Why $g$ is nearly constant near the Earth's surface

    The Earth's radius is $R \approx 6.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$. Rising to height $h$ changes the distance from the centre from $R$ to $R + h$. For $h \ll R$ (any building or mountain), $(R + h)/R \approx 1$, so $g$ barely changes — going from $5\ \text{m}$ to $10\ \text{m}$ high changes $r$ by about one part in a million. In the laboratory, $g$ is effectively constant.

    Explore

    Newton's law of gravitation

    F ∝ Mm / r²

    Gravity pulls inward and weakens with the square of the distance.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Newton's law of gravitation 万有引力定律 wàn yǒu yǐn lì dìng lǜ
    universal gravitational constant 万有引力常量 wàn yǒu yǐn lì cháng liàng
    13.2 13.3

    Orbital motion in a gravitational field

    The International Space Station in orbit above Earth
    The International Space Station orbits Earth, held in its path by gravity.
    A planet of mass m on a dashed circular orbit of radius r around the Sun of mass M at the centre, with the gravitational force F pointing to the centre and the speed v along the tangent
    Gravity provides the centripetal force that keeps a planet in a circular orbit
    A NASA photograph of Saturn against black space: the round planet with pale cloud bands, surrounded by its wide flat ring system, with a few small moons visible as bright dots
    Saturn, its rings (countless small orbiting pieces) and its moons are all held in orbit by gravity

    For a satellite 卫星 of mass $m$ in a circular orbit 轨道 of radius $r$ around a body of mass $M$, gravity provides the centripetal force 向心力:

    $$\frac{G M m}{r^{2}} = \frac{m v^{2}}{r}.$$

    Cancel $m$ (the orbital speed does not depend on the satellite's mass):

    $$v = \sqrt{\frac{G M}{r}}.$$

    Worked example. A satellite orbits the Earth in a circular orbit of radius $r = 7.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$. Find its orbital speed. (For the Earth, $GM = 4.0 \times 10^{14}\ \text{m}^{3}\ \text{s}^{-2}$.)

    $$v = \sqrt{\frac{GM}{r}} = \sqrt{\frac{4.0 \times 10^{14}}{7.0 \times 10^{6}}} \approx 7.6 \times 10^{3}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    The period 周期 follows from $T = 2\pi r / v$:

    $$T = 2\pi \sqrt{\frac{r^{3}}{G M}}, \quad\text{so}\quad T^{2} = \frac{4\pi^{2}}{G M} \cdot r^{3}.$$

    This is Kepler's third law 开普勒第三定律 for circular orbits: $T^{2} \propto r^{3}$. A plot of $T^{2}$ against $r^{3}$ is a straight line through the origin with gradient $4\pi^{2}/(GM)$, so orbital data gives the central mass.

    A graph of T squared against r cubed: the orbital data lie on a straight line through the origin, confirming Kepler's third law, with gradient 4 pi squared over GM
    Kepler's third law: $T^2 \propto r^3$, a straight line through the origin

    Geostationary orbit

    A geostationary 地球同步 satellite:

    • stays directly above the same point on the Earth (so a fixed dish always points at it),
    • has a period of 24 hours (the same as the Earth's rotation),
    • orbits west to east (the same way the Earth turns),
    • must be directly above the equator 赤道.

    It must have the same angular speed 角速度 as the Earth, in the same direction, in the equatorial plane (or it would drift north–south during the day). From $T = 24\ \text{h}$ and $T^{2} = 4\pi^{2} r^{3}/(GM)$, the radius is $r \approx 4.2 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m}$ (about $3.6 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m}$ above the surface).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    satellite 卫星 wèi xīng
    orbit 轨道 guǐ dào
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    Kepler's third law 开普勒第三定律 kāi pǔ lēi dì sān dìng lǜ
    geostationary 地球同步 dì qiú tóng bù
    equator 赤道 chì dào
    angular speed 角速度 jiǎo sù dù
    13.4

    Gravitational potential

    Syllabus
    1. define gravitational potential at a point as the work done per unit mass in bringing a small test mass from infinity to the point
    2. use $\phi = -GM/r$ for the gravitational potential in the field due to a point mass
    3. understand how the concept of gravitational potential leads to the gravitational potential energy of two point masses and use $E_P = -GMm/r$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Gravitational potential 引力势 $\phi$ at a point is the work done per unit mass in bringing a small test mass from infinity 无穷远 to that point:

    $$\phi = \frac{W}{m}.$$

    Unit: $\text{J kg}^{-1}$.

    The potential is taken as zero at infinity. As the test mass falls in towards the source, gravity does the work for you, so $\phi$ is negative everywhere except at infinity. For a point mass $M$ at distance $r$:

    $$\phi = -\frac{G M}{r}.$$

    $\phi$ is a scalar 标量. For several masses, add the potentials.

    A graph of gravitational potential against distance r: phi = minus GM over r is negative everywhere, deepest near the surface R and rising towards zero at large r — a potential well
    The gravitational potential well: $\phi = -GM/r$ is negative, rising to zero at infinity

    Gravitational potential energy of two point masses

    If a test mass $m$ sits where the potential is $\phi$, the gravitational potential energy 重力势能 of the pair is

    $$E_{\text{P}} = m \phi = -\frac{G M m}{r}.$$

    Like the potential, $E_{\text{P}}$ is negative and reaches zero only at infinite separation. Closer masses have more negative potential energy (more tightly bound).

    Link with $\Delta E_{\text{P}} = mg\Delta h$

    For small height changes near the surface, $r$ barely changes, so $\Delta E_{\text{P}} \approx mg\Delta h$. For large changes (a satellite moving to a higher orbit) use $-GMm/r$ at each radius and take the difference:

    $$\Delta E_{\text{P}} = GMm\left(\frac{1}{r_{1}} - \frac{1}{r_{2}}\right) \quad (r_{2} > r_{1}),$$

    which is positive (energy must be supplied to raise the satellite).

    Escape velocity (from conservation of energy)

    To escape from radius $r$ to infinity, an object's kinetic energy 动能 must equal the size of its gravitational potential energy:

    $$\tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{esc}}^{2} = \frac{G M m}{r}, \qquad v_{\text{esc}} = \sqrt{\frac{2 G M}{r}}.$$

    At the Earth's surface, the escape velocity 逃逸速度 is $\approx 11\ \text{km s}^{-1}$. It does not depend on the object's mass.

    Worked example. Find the escape velocity from the Earth's surface. (For the Earth, $GM = 4.0 \times 10^{14}\ \text{m}^{3}\ \text{s}^{-2}$, $R = 6.4 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m}$.)

    $$v_{\text{esc}} = \sqrt{\frac{2GM}{R}} = \sqrt{\frac{2 (4.0 \times 10^{14})}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}} \approx 1.1 \times 10^{4}\ \text{m s}^{-1}\ (= 11\ \text{km s}^{-1}).$$
    Explore

    Gravitational potential

    V = −GM / r

    Potential ∝ −1/r — deep near the mass, flattening with distance.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gravitational potential 引力势 yǐn lì shì
    infinity 无穷远 wú qióng yuǎn
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    gravitational potential energy 重力势能 zhòng lì shì néng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    escape velocity 逃逸速度 táo yì sù dù
    13.4

    Exam tips

    • Newton's law of gravitation $F = GMm/r^2$ (inverse-square); field strength $g = GM/r^2$.
    • Distinguish gravitational potential ($\phi = -GM/r$, always negative, zero at infinity) from field strength.
    • For an orbit set gravity $=$ centripetal force to get $T^2 \propto r^3$; a geostationary orbit has $T = 24\ \text{h}$.
  • 14 Temperature
    14.1

    Thermal equilibrium

    Syllabus
    1. understand that (thermal) energy is transferred from a region of higher temperature to a region of lower temperature
    2. understand that regions of equal temperature are in thermal equilibrium

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Heat 热量 (thermal energy) flows from a higher temperature to a lower temperature. When two bodies touch, energy moves until their temperatures are equal — they reach thermal equilibrium 热平衡. At equilibrium there is no net flow of energy.

    Two regions at the same temperature 温度 are in thermal equilibrium with each other — no net energy flows, even though particles still exchange energy.

    Temperature decides the direction of heat flow. It is not a measure of how much thermal energy 热能 a body holds. A small cup of boiling water (100 °C) holds far less energy than a swimming pool at 25 °C, but a piece of metal put in the cup gains energy while one put in the pool loses it.

    Heat flows from a hot body at temperature T1 to a cold body at T2 until both reach the same temperature T_eq, when there is no net flow
    Heat flows from hot to cold until both reach the same temperature — thermal equilibrium
    Explore

    Thermal equilibrium route

    Watch energy transfer until two objects reach the same temperature.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    heat 热量 rè liàng
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    thermal equilibrium 热平衡 rè píng héng
    thermal energy 热能 rè néng
    14.2

    Measuring temperature

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a physical property that varies with temperature may be used for the measurement of temperature and state examples of such properties, including the density of a liquid, volume of a gas at constant pressure, resistance of a metal, e.m.f. of a thermocouple
    2. understand that the scale of thermodynamic temperature does not depend on the property of any particular substance
    3. convert temperatures between kelvin and degrees Celsius and recall that $T/\text{K} = \theta/\text{ }^{\circ}\text{C} + 273.15$
    4. understand that the lowest possible temperature is zero kelvin on the thermodynamic temperature scale and that this is known as absolute zero

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A mercury-in-glass thermometer
    A thermometer measures temperature on a defined scale.

    Any physical property that changes in a repeatable way with temperature can make a thermometer 温度计. Examples:

    • volume of a liquid — a liquid-in-glass thermometer (mercury or alcohol). As the temperature rises, the liquid expands and rises up a narrow capillary 毛细管.
    • volume of a gas at constant pressure — a gas thermometer. The gas volume rises in step with the absolute temperature.
    • resistance of a metal — a resistance thermometer. A metal's resistance 电阻 rises nearly in step with temperature over a wide range.
    • e.m.f. of a thermocouple — a thermocouple 热电偶 is two different metals joined at two points; the electromotive force 电动势 it makes depends on the temperature difference between the joins.

    Different thermometers can read slightly differently if the property does not change in a straight line; they agree only at the calibration 校准 points.

    A constant-volume gas thermometer: a bulb of gas connected to a mercury manometer, with the pressure read from the height difference h between the two mercury levels
    A constant-volume gas thermometer — the gas pressure is found from the height difference h
    A thermal-camera (infrared) image of fast food: a paper bag of fries glowing bright yellow and orange next to a drinks cup that appears dark, all on a purple background
    A thermal (infrared) camera maps temperature to colour: the hot fries glow bright orange, the cold drink stays dark
    Explore

    Temperature scale lab

    Kelvin index = Celsius index + 2.73

    Slide Celsius temperature and see the Kelvin scale shift by 273.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thermometer 温度计 wēn dù jì
    capillary 毛细管 máo xì guǎn
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    thermocouple 热电偶 rè diàn ǒu
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    calibration 校准 jiào zhǔn
    14.2

    Thermodynamic temperature scale

    The thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 (or absolute temperature 绝对温度) scale does not depend on any one substance — only on the laws of thermodynamics. Its unit is the kelvin 开尔文 (K).

    Absolute zero

    The lowest possible temperature is zero kelvin ($0\ \text{K}$), called absolute zero 绝对零度. There a system has its least possible internal energy 内能 — particles have no random motion to speak of. Nothing can be cooled below this.

    A graph of gas pressure against temperature in degrees Celsius: a straight line measured between 0 and 100 °C, extended back as a dashed line to meet zero pressure at about −273 °C
    Extrapolating the pressure–temperature line back to zero pressure gives absolute zero, about −273 °C

    Celsius scale

    The Celsius 摄氏度 scale $\theta$ is shifted from the thermodynamic scale by a fixed amount:

    $$T / \text{K} = \theta / {}^{\circ}\text{C} + 273.15.$$

    So $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C} = 273.15\ \text{K}$ and $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C} = 373.15\ \text{K}$. A kelvin and a degree Celsius are the same size, so a temperature difference of $1\ \text{K}$ equals $1\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ — but the absolute values differ by $273.15$.

    In gas-law calculations you must always use absolute temperatures in kelvin. Using °C gives wrong answers.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 rè lì xué wēn dù
    absolute temperature 绝对温度 jué duì wēn dù
    kelvin 开尔文 kāi ěr wén
    absolute zero 绝对零度 jué duì líng dù
    internal energy 内能 nèi néng
    Celsius 摄氏度 shè shì dù
    14.3

    Specific heat capacity

    Syllabus
    1. define and use specific heat capacity
    2. define and use specific latent heat and distinguish between specific latent heat of fusion and specific latent heat of vaporisation

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The specific heat capacity 比热容 $c$ of a substance is the energy 能量 needed to raise the temperature of unit mass by one kelvin:

    $$c = \frac{Q}{m \Delta T} \qquad\Longleftrightarrow\qquad Q = m c \Delta T.$$

    Unit: $\text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.

    Examples:

    • water: $c \approx 4200\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$ (high — why water is a good coolant and why oceans steady the climate).
    • aluminium: $c \approx 900\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.
    • copper: $c \approx 385\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.
    A bar chart of specific heat capacities: water 4200, ice 2100, aluminium 900 and copper 385 J per kg per K — water is far higher than the solids
    Water's specific heat capacity is far higher than common solids — why it is such a good coolant

    To find an unknown $c$ by experiment: supply known energy $Q$ electrically ($Q = VIt$, from the power 功率), then measure the temperature rise $\Delta T$ of a known mass 质量 $m$. Then $c = Q/(m\Delta T)$. Reduce heat loss with insulation 隔热 and use a rise of about 10 K (big enough to measure well, small enough to limit losses).

    Worked example. How much energy is needed to heat $0.50\ \text{kg}$ of water from $20\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$? (Specific heat capacity of water $c = 4200\ \text{J kg}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.)

    A temperature difference is the same in K and °C, so $\Delta T = 80$:

    $$Q = mc\Delta T = 0.50 \times 4200 \times 80 = 1.68 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}\ (= 168\ \text{kJ}).$$

    When two bodies reach thermal equilibrium with no heat lost to the surroundings, the energy gained by the colder one equals the energy lost by the hotter one:

    $$m_{1} c_{1} (T_{\text{eq}} - T_{1}) = m_{2} c_{2} (T_{2} - T_{\text{eq}}).$$

    Worked example. $0.20\ \text{kg}$ of water at $80\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ is mixed with $0.30\ \text{kg}$ of water at $20\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$, with no heat lost. Find the final temperature.

    The heat lost by the hot water equals the heat gained by the cold water (the $c$ of water cancels):

    $$0.20\,(80 - T_{\text{eq}}) = 0.30\,(T_{\text{eq}} - 20) \quad\Rightarrow\quad T_{\text{eq}} = 44\ ^{\circ}\text{C}.$$
    Explore

    Energy to heat it: E = mcΔT

    Pick a material, set the mass and the temperature rise, and read the energy. Water needs far more energy than the metals.

    Explore

    Specific heat capacity

    Q = mcΔT

    The heat needed is proportional to the temperature rise — the gradient depends on mass and the material's specific heat capacity.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    specific heat capacity 比热容 bǐ rè róng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    mass 质量 zhì liàng
    insulation 隔热 gé rè
    14.3

    Specific latent heat

    When a substance changes state (solid ↔ liquid, or liquid ↔ gas) at constant temperature, energy must be supplied (or removed) with no temperature change. This energy is the latent heat 潜热.

    The specific latent heat 比潜热 $L$ is the energy to change the state of unit mass at constant temperature:

    $$L = \frac{Q}{m} \qquad\Longleftrightarrow\qquad Q = m L.$$

    Unit: $\text{J kg}^{-1}$.

    Two kinds:

    • specific latent heat of fusion 熔化 $L_{\text{f}}$ — for melting or freezing (solid ↔ liquid).
    • specific latent heat of vaporisation 汽化 $L_{\text{v}}$ — for boiling or condensing (liquid ↔ gas).

    For water at atmospheric pressure: $L_{\text{f}} \approx 3.34 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$ (at $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$); $L_{\text{v}} \approx 2.26 \times 10^{6}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$ (at $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$). So $L_{\text{v}}$ is about 7 times $L_{\text{f}}$.

    A heating curve of temperature against energy for water: ice warms up a slope, melts on a flat plateau at 0 degrees, water warms up a steeper slope, boils on a long flat plateau at 100 degrees, then steam warms — the flat plateaus are the phase changes at constant temperature
    Heating curve: the sloped parts warm the substance ($mc\Delta T$); the flat plateaus are the phase changes ($mL$)

    Worked example. A $2.0\ \text{kW}$ heater boils water already at $100\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$. How long does it take to turn $0.10\ \text{kg}$ of this water into steam? ($L_{\text{v}} = 2.26 \times 10^{6}\ \text{J kg}^{-1}$, no heat lost.)

    The energy needed is $Q = mL_{\text{v}} = 0.10 \times 2.26 \times 10^{6} = 2.26 \times 10^{5}\ \text{J}$. From $Q = Pt$,

    $$t = \frac{Q}{P} = \frac{2.26 \times 10^{5}}{2000} \approx 110\ \text{s}.$$

    Why $L_{\text{v}} > L_{\text{f}}$

    Two reasons, both from the particle picture of matter:

    1. Bonds: in melting, only some of the intermolecular 分子间 bonds break; the particles stay close as a liquid. In boiling, all the bonds must break so the particles can separate. Breaking all of them needs more energy.
    2. Work against the atmosphere: when a liquid turns to gas it expands hugely (vapour has about $10^{3}$ times the liquid's volume 体积), so it does work pushing back the surrounding atmospheric pressure 大气压强. That work comes from the energy supplied.

    Multi-step problems

    If a problem mixes temperature change and a phase change 相变 (e.g. ice at $-5\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ warming to water at $30\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$):

    1. heat the solid from $-5\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$: $Q_{1} = m c_{\text{ice}} \times 5$.
    2. melt at $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$: $Q_{2} = m L_{\text{f}}$.
    3. heat the water from $0\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ to $30\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$: $Q_{3} = m c_{\text{water}} \times 30$.

    Total: $Q_{1} + Q_{2} + Q_{3}$. A phase change is at constant temperature, so use $mL$ there, not $mc\Delta T$.

    A multi-step heating problem in three stages: warm the ice from -5 to 0 degrees (Q1 = m c times 5), melt it at 0 degrees (Q2 = m L_f), then warm the water to 30 degrees (Q3 = m c times 30); add Q1 + Q2 + Q3
    Split a mixed problem into stages — warm, change state, warm — then add the energies

    When a question gives heater power $P$ and asks for the time, use $Q = Pt$ (assuming no heat loss). Insulating (lagging) the container and using a small mass are common ways to improve the experiment.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    latent heat 潜热 qián rè
    specific latent heat 比潜热 bǐ qián rè
    fusion 熔化 róng huà
    vaporisation 汽化 qì huà
    intermolecular 分子间 fèn zǐ jiān
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    atmospheric pressure 大气压强 dà qì yā qiáng
    phase change 相变 xiāng biàn
    14.3

    Exam tips

    • Thermal equilibrium means no net heat flow (equal temperature); the thermodynamic scale is fixed by absolute zero and the triple point.
    • Convert temperatures with $T/\text{K} = \theta/^\circ\text{C} + 273.15$ and use kelvin in energy and gas equations.
    • Use $Q = mc\Delta T$ for heating and $Q = mL$ for a change of state (no temperature change) — never mix the two.
  • 15 Ideal gases
    15.1

    The mole

    Syllabus
    1. understand that amount of substance is an SI base quantity with the base unit mol
    2. use molar quantities where one mole of any substance is the amount containing a number of particles of that substance equal to the Avogadro constant $N_{\text{A}}$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Amount of substance 物质的量 is an SI base quantity. Its unit is the mole 摩尔 (mol) — one of the seven SI base units, with the kilogram, metre, second, ampere and kelvin 开尔文 from Topic 1.

    One mole contains the Avogadro number of particles
    One mole contains the Avogadro number of particles

    One mole of any substance has a number of particles equal to the Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量:

    $$N_{\text{A}} = 6.02 \times 10^{23}\ \text{mol}^{-1}.$$

    A "particle" means whatever you are counting — atoms 原子 for a monatomic 单原子 element like helium, molecules 分子 for $\text{O}_{2}$ or $\text{H}_{2}\text{O}$. Always say what you are counting.

    For $n$ moles, the number of particles is $N = n N_{\text{A}}$.

    The molar mass 摩尔质量 $M_{\text{m}}$ is the mass of one mole ($\text{kg mol}^{-1}$ or $\text{g mol}^{-1}$). Mass of $n$ moles is $M = n M_{\text{m}}$. Mass of one particle is $m_{0} = M_{\text{m}} / N_{\text{A}}$.

    Explore

    Mole particle count lab

    particles = n x Avogadro constant

    Change amount of substance and see particle number scale directly.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    amount of substance 物质的量 wù zhì dì liàng
    mole 摩尔 mó ěr
    kelvin 开尔文 kāi ěr wén
    Avogadro constant 阿伏伽德罗常量 ā fú gā dé luó cháng liàng
    atom 原子 yuán zi
    monatomic 单原子 dān yuán zi
    molecule 分子 fèn zǐ
    molar mass 摩尔质量 mó ěr zhì liàng
    15.2

    Equation of state of an ideal gas

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a gas obeying $pV \propto T$, where $T$ is the thermodynamic temperature, is known as an ideal gas
    2. recall and use the equation of state for an ideal gas expressed as $pV = nRT$, where $n =$ amount of substance (number of moles) and as $pV = NkT$, where $N =$ number of molecules
    3. recall that the Boltzmann constant $k$ is given by $k = R/N_{\text{A}}$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Rows of compressed gas cylinders
    Compressed gas cylinders store a fixed mass of gas at high pressure.

    An ideal gas 理想气体 obeys $pV \propto T$ exactly, where $T$ is the thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度.

    The equation of state 状态方程 can be written two equal ways:

    $$p V = n R T \qquad\text{or}\qquad p V = N k T.$$

    Here:

    • $p$pressure 压强 (Pa).
    • $V$volume 体积 (m³).
    • $T$ — thermodynamic temperature in kelvin (never °C).
    • $n$ — number of moles; $N$ — number of molecules.
    • $R$molar gas constant 摩尔气体常量, $R = 8.31\ \text{J mol}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.
    • $k$Boltzmann constant 玻尔兹曼常量, $k = 1.38 \times 10^{-23}\ \text{J K}^{-1}$.

    Since $N = n N_{\text{A}}$, we get $k = R/N_{\text{A}}$: $k$ is the gas constant per molecule, as $R$ is per mole.

    Using the equation of state

    List the variables you have, find the unknown, and choose the form that matches your "amount" (moles → $nRT$; molecules → $NkT$). Always use SI units: Pa, m³, K.

    Worked example. A cylinder of volume $0.020\ \text{m}^{3}$ holds gas at $27\ ^{\circ}\text{C}$ and a pressure of $2.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$. How many moles of gas are there? ($R = 8.31\ \text{J mol}^{-1}\ \text{K}^{-1}$.)

    Convert to kelvin: $T = 27 + 273 = 300\ \text{K}$. Then from $pV = nRT$,

    $$n = \frac{pV}{RT} = \frac{(2.0 \times 10^{5})(0.020)}{8.31 \times 300} \approx 1.6\ \text{mol}.$$

    If a fixed amount of gas changes from state 1 to state 2:

    $$\frac{p_{1} V_{1}}{T_{1}} = \frac{p_{2} V_{2}}{T_{2}}.$$

    Worked example. A fixed mass of gas at $300\ \text{K}$ occupies $0.50\ \text{m}^{3}$. It is heated to $450\ \text{K}$ at constant pressure. Find the new volume.

    At constant pressure $V/T$ is constant, so

    $$V_{2} = V_{1}\,\frac{T_{2}}{T_{1}} = 0.50 \times \frac{450}{300} = 0.75\ \text{m}^{3}.$$

    Special cases:

    • constant temperature (Boyle's law 玻意耳定律): $p_{1} V_{1} = p_{2} V_{2}$.
    • constant pressure (Charles's law 查理定律): $V / T = \text{constant}$.
    • constant volume (pressure law 气体压强定律): $p / T = \text{constant}$.

    A common mistake is using °C instead of K — $pV \propto T$ only holds with $T$ in kelvin.

    Two pressure-volume curves: at constant temperature pV is constant, so each graph is a hyperbola; a higher temperature gives a curve further from the origin
    Boyle's law: at constant temperature $pV$ is constant, so a $p$$V$ graph is a hyperbola
    A graph of gas volume against temperature in degrees Celsius at constant pressure: a straight line through the measured points, extended back as a dashed line to meet zero volume at about
    At constant pressure the volume of a gas rises linearly with temperature, reaching zero at absolute zero (Charles's law)
    Explore

    The ideal gas (Boyle)

    p = k / V

    At constant temperature p ∝ 1/V — squeeze the volume and pressure rises.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    ideal gas 理想气体 lǐ xiǎng qì tǐ
    thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 rè lì xué wēn dù
    equation of state 状态方程 zhuàng tài fāng chéng
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    molar gas constant 摩尔气体常量 mó ěr qì tǐ cháng liàng
    Boltzmann constant 玻尔兹曼常量 bō ěr zī màn cháng liàng
    Boyle's law 玻意耳定律 bō yì ěr dìng lǜ
    Charles's law 查理定律 chá lǐ dìng lǜ
    pressure law 气体压强定律 qì tǐ yā qiáng dìng lǜ
    Exercise sheet
    15.3

    Kinetic theory of gases

    Syllabus
    1. state the basic assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases
    2. explain how molecular movement causes the pressure exerted by a gas and derive and use the relationship $pV = \frac{1}{3}Nm\langle c^2 \rangle$, where $\langle c^2 \rangle$ is the mean-square speed (a simple model considering one-dimensional collisions and then extending to three dimensions using $\frac{1}{3}\langle c^2 \rangle = \langle c_x^2 \rangle$ is sufficient)
    3. understand that the root-mean-square speed $c_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ is given by $\sqrt{\langle c^2 \rangle}$
    4. compare $pV = \frac{1}{3}Nm\langle c^2 \rangle$ with $pV = NkT$ to deduce that the average translational kinetic energy of a molecule is $\frac{3}{2}kT$, and recall and use this expression

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Kinetic theory: gas pressure
    A scuba diver underwater
    A scuba diver breathes compressed gas; its pressure, volume and temperature are all linked.

    The kinetic theory 分子动理论 explains a gas's large-scale behaviour from the random motion 无规则运动 of its molecules.

    Assumptions

    For an ideal gas:

    1. a large number of identical molecules in continuous random motion.
    2. the molecules' own volume is too small to matter compared with the container.
    3. the time of each collision is too short to matter compared with the time between collisions.
    4. intermolecular 分子间 forces are ignored except during collisions (molecules go in straight lines between them).
    5. collisions (with the walls and with each other) are elastic — an elastic collision 弹性碰撞 loses no kinetic energy, so the gas does not cool down by itself.
    6. Newton's laws apply.
    Molecules moving in straight lines in a box, labelled with the kinetic-theory assumptions: many identical molecules in random motion, negligible own volume, no forces between collisions, and elastic collisions
    The key assumptions of the kinetic theory of an ideal gas

    These assumptions become poor at very high pressure (molecular volume matters) or very low temperature (intermolecular forces matter).

    Pressure of a gas — outline of the derivation

    Take a cubic box of side $L$ with $N$ molecules, each of mass $m$. Look at one molecule moving along the $x$-axis with velocity $u_{1}$.

    A cube of gas of side  with one molecule shown moving with a velocity component  directed at right angles towards one face
    The pressure derivation considers one molecule's velocity component $u_x$ normal to a face of a cube of gas
    • one collision with the right wall: velocity reverses to $-u_{1}$, change in momentum 动量 $\Delta p_{x} = -2 m u_{1}$. By Newton's third law the wall gets an impulse 冲量 of $+2 m u_{1}$.
    • time between hits on that wall: travel $2L$ there and back, so $\Delta t = 2L/u_{1}$.
    • average force from this molecule: $F_{1} = \Delta p / \Delta t = m u_{1}^{2} / L$.
    • add over all molecules: $F = (Nm/L)\langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle$, where $\langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle$ is the mean square 均方 of the $x$-velocity.
    • pressure: $p = F/L^{2} = N m \langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle / V$.

    In 3-D, by symmetry $\langle u_{x}^{2} \rangle = \tfrac{1}{3} \langle c^{2} \rangle$, where $\langle c^{2} \rangle$ is the mean-square speed 均方速率. So

    $$p V = \tfrac{1}{3} N m \langle c^{2} \rangle.$$

    Root-mean-square speed

    The square root of $\langle c^{2} \rangle$ is the root-mean-square 均方根 (r.m.s.) speed:

    $$c_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\langle c^{2} \rangle}.$$

    It is a useful single measure of how fast the molecules move, slightly larger than the mean speed (squaring weights fast molecules more).

    Root-mean-square speed built in four steps: take the speeds, square each one, take the mean of the squares, then take the square root
    Root-mean-square speed: square each speed, take the mean, then the square root
    The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution of molecular speeds: at a lower temperature the curve is tall and narrow; at a higher temperature it is broader and shifted to higher speeds. The root-mean-square speed is marked
    The spread of molecular speeds: a higher temperature broadens the curve and shifts it to faster speeds
    Explore

    Boyle's law

    p ∝ 1/V

    At constant temperature, pressure is inversely proportional to volume — squash the gas and the pressure rises.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    kinetic theory 分子动理论 fèn zǐ dòng lǐ lùn
    random motion 无规则运动 wú guī zé yùn dòng
    intermolecular 分子间 fèn zǐ jiān
    elastic collision 弹性碰撞 tán xìng pèng zhuàng
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    impulse 冲量 chōng liàng
    mean square 均方 jūn fāng
    mean-square speed 均方速率 jūn fāng sù lǜ
    root-mean-square 均方根 jūn fāng gēn
    Exercise sheet
    15.3

    Average translational kinetic energy

    Compare the two expressions for $pV$:

    $$p V = N k T \quad\text{and}\quad p V = \tfrac{1}{3} N m \langle c^{2} \rangle.$$

    Set them equal, cancel $N$, and multiply by $\tfrac{3}{2}$:

    $$\tfrac{3}{2} k T = \tfrac{1}{2} m \langle c^{2} \rangle.$$

    The right side is the average translational kinetic energy 平动动能 $\langle E_{\text{k}} \rangle$ of one molecule. So

    $$\langle E_{\text{k}} \rangle = \tfrac{1}{2} m \langle c^{2} \rangle = \tfrac{3}{2} k T.$$

    This is a key result: the average translational kinetic energy of an ideal-gas molecule depends only on the thermodynamic temperature, not on the type of gas or its pressure.

    A straight line through the origin of average kinetic energy against temperature, showing that the average KE is proportional to the thermodynamic temperature
    Average molecular KE is proportional to thermodynamic temperature: $\langle E_k \rangle = \tfrac32 kT$

    Worked example. Find the root-mean-square speed of oxygen molecules at $300\ \text{K}$. (Mass of one $\text{O}_{2}$ molecule $= 5.3 \times 10^{-26}\ \text{kg}$, $k = 1.38 \times 10^{-23}\ \text{J K}^{-1}$.)

    From $\tfrac{1}{2}m\langle c^{2}\rangle = \tfrac{3}{2}kT$, the mean-square speed is $\langle c^{2}\rangle = 3kT/m$:

    $$c_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\frac{3kT}{m}} = \sqrt{\frac{3 (1.38 \times 10^{-23})(300)}{5.3 \times 10^{-26}}} \approx 480\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Consequences

    • doubling the absolute temperature doubles the average KE of each molecule, so $\langle c^{2} \rangle$ doubles and $c_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ grows by $\sqrt{2}$.
    • for two gases at the same temperature, the lighter gas has a larger $\langle c^{2} \rangle$. Hydrogen molecules move faster on average than oxygen molecules in the same room.
    • total translational KE of $N$ molecules: $\tfrac{3}{2} N k T = \tfrac{3}{2} n R T$.

    Internal energy of an ideal gas

    For an ideal gas the molecules are point particles with no intermolecular potential energy and (in this simple model) no rotation or vibration. So the internal energy 内能 is just the total kinetic energy 动能:

    $$U = \tfrac{3}{2} N k T = \tfrac{3}{2} n R T.$$

    So the internal energy of an ideal gas is proportional to the thermodynamic temperature — doubling $T$ doubles $U$.

    Changing pressure at fixed temperature

    Doubling $p$ at fixed $T$ (by squeezing the gas to half its volume) does not change $\langle E_{\text{k}} \rangle$ — that depends only on $T$. There are more wall collisions per second, but each molecule has the same average kinetic energy.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    translational kinetic energy 平动动能 píng dòng dòng néng
    internal energy 内能 nèi néng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    15.3

    Exam tips

    • Use $pV = nRT$ ($n$ in mol) or $pV = NkT$ ($N$ molecules), with temperature in kelvin.
    • Learn the kinetic-theory assumptions (random motion, negligible molecular volume, elastic collisions, no intermolecular forces).
    • Mean translational KE $= \frac{3}{2}kT$ — it depends only on temperature.
  • 16 Thermodynamics
    16.1

    Internal energy

    Syllabus
    1. understand that internal energy is determined by the state of the system and that it can be expressed as the sum of a random distribution of kinetic and potential energies associated with the molecules of a system
    2. relate a rise in temperature of an object to an increase in its internal energy

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The internal energy 内能 $U$ of a system is the sum of:

    • the random kinetic energies 动能 of its molecules 分子 — they fly through space (translational 平动 motion), and unless they are single atoms they also spin (rotational 转动) and shake (vibrational 振动), and
    • the potential energies from the forces between the molecules.

    For a real solid, liquid or gas, both parts matter. In the ideal-gas 理想气体 model the intermolecular 分子间 forces are ignored, so the molecular potential energy is zero and the internal energy is purely kinetic.

    Five gas molecules drawn as discs, each with an arrow showing it moving in a random direction, and short springs linking neighbouring molecules to stand for the forces between them: the arrows are the molecules' kinetic energy and the springs are the potential energy
    Internal energy is the molecules' random kinetic energy (the arrows) plus the potential energy of the forces between them (the springs)

    Two key points:

    1. $U$ depends only on the state of the system (its temperature 温度, pressure 压强, volume 体积, amount of substance 物质的量) — not on the path taken to get there.
    2. $U$ is a sum over the molecules, not the kinetic energy of the whole object moving. A moving train of gas has bulk kinetic energy, but that is separate from $U$$U$ is the energy of the random molecular motion.

    Temperature and internal energy

    Raising an object's temperature raises the random kinetic energy of its molecules, and so raises its internal energy.

    For an ideal gas every molecule has average translational kinetic energy $\tfrac{3}{2} k T$ (Topic 15). With zero intermolecular potential energy, the total internal energy is

    $$U = \tfrac{3}{2} N k T = \tfrac{3}{2} n R T.$$

    So the internal energy of an ideal gas is directly proportional to the thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度. Doubling $T$ doubles $U$. This is only exact for an ideal gas.

    During a phase change 相变 (melting or boiling) of a real substance, $U$ rises because the molecular potential energy rises (bonds breaking), even though the temperature stays constant.

    Explore

    The spread of molecular energies

    Internal energy is the total random kinetic + potential energy of the molecules. Heat the gas and the whole speed distribution shifts to higher energy.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    internal energy 内能 nèi néng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    molecule 分子 fèn zǐ
    translational 平动 píng dòng
    rotational 转动 zhuǎn dòng
    vibrational 振动 zhèn dòng
    ideal gas 理想气体 lǐ xiǎng qì tǐ
    intermolecular 分子间 fèn zǐ jiān
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    pressure 压强 yā qiáng
    volume 体积 tǐ jī
    amount of substance 物质的量 wù zhì dì liàng
    thermodynamic temperature 热力学温度 rè lì xué wēn dù
    phase change 相变 xiāng biàn
    16.2

    Work done on or by a gas

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $W = p\Delta V$ for the work done when the volume of a gas changes at constant pressure and understand the difference between the work done by the gas and the work done on the gas
    2. recall and use the first law of thermodynamics $\Delta U = q + W$ expressed in terms of the increase in internal energy, the heating of the system (energy transferred to the system by heating) and the work done on the system

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The rotor of a steam turbine
    A steam turbine does work as expanding steam pushes its blades around.
    A gas in a cylinder pushing a piston of cross-sectional area A outwards by a distance Δx against an external pressure p; the gas volume rises by the swept amount ΔV = A Δx, so the gas does work W = p ΔV on the surroundings
    A gas pushing a piston of area $A$ out by $\Delta x$ does work $W = p\,\Delta V$ on the surroundings (swept volume $\Delta V = A\,\Delta x$)

    When a gas changes volume against an outside pressure, mechanical work is done. At constant pressure $p$ with a small volume change $\Delta V$, the size of the work is

    $$W = p \Delta V.$$

    Worked example. A gas at a constant pressure of $1.0 \times 10^{5}\ \text{Pa}$ expands from $2.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$ to $5.0 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m}^{3}$. Find the work done by the gas.

    $$W = p\,\Delta V = (1.0 \times 10^{5})(5.0 \times 10^{-3} - 2.0 \times 10^{-3}) = 300\ \text{J}.$$
    A pressure-volume graph with a horizontal orange line at constant pressure p running from volume V1 to V2; the rectangle beneath the line is shaded and labelled work done W = p times Delta V, and an arrow above the line shows the gas expanding from V1 to V2
    On a pressure–volume graph, the work done at constant pressure is the area under the line: $W = p\,\Delta V$

    Sign convention in this syllabus

    This syllabus writes the first law as $\Delta U = q + W$, where $W$ is the work done on the gas and $q$ is the energy put in by heating.

    Two cylinder diagrams. Compression: a piston is pushed into the gas so the volume falls, and the work done on the gas is positive. Expansion: the gas pushes the piston out so the volume rises, and the work done on the gas is negative
    Work done on the gas: positive when it is compressed, negative when it expands
    • when the gas is compressed, $\Delta V$ is negative and the work done on the gas is positive — the gas gains energy.
    • when the gas expands, $\Delta V$ is positive and the work done on the gas is negative — the gas loses energy (it does work on the surroundings).

    Watch which form a question wants:

    • "work done on the gas" — positive when compressing.
    • "work done by the gas" — the opposite sign, positive when expanding.

    At constant volume ($\Delta V = 0$), no work is done.

    16.2

    First law of thermodynamics

    A power station with cooling towers
    A power station is a heat engine: it converts heat into useful work.

    The first law of thermodynamics 热力学第一定律 says that energy is conserved when heat and work pass between a system and its surroundings:

    $$\Delta U = q + W,$$

    where $\Delta U$ is the rise in internal energy, $q$ is the energy added by heating (positive in, negative out), and $W$ is the work done on the gas (positive when compressed). This is conservation of energy 能量守恒 for a gas.

    A box labelled gas, the system, with a blue arrow labelled q, energy in by heating, entering from the left and an orange arrow labelled W, work done on the gas, entering from the right; below the box is the equation Delta U = q + W with a note that each term is positive when energy goes into the gas
    Both heating ($q$) and work done on the gas ($W$) put energy in, raising the internal energy by $\Delta U$

    Worked example. A gas absorbs $500\ \text{J}$ of heat while it expands and does $200\ \text{J}$ of work on its surroundings. Find the change in its internal energy.

    The gas does work, so the work done on it is $W = -200\ \text{J}$:

    $$\Delta U = q + W = 500 + (-200) = 300\ \text{J}.$$

    Reading the equation

    $\Delta U$ is fixed by the change of state (for an ideal gas, by the change in temperature). The same $\Delta U$ can come from different mixes of $q$ and $W$:

    • all heat, no work: $\Delta U = q$ (constant-volume heating).
    • all work, no heat: $\Delta U = W$ (insulated compression or expansion).

    Standard processes

    For an ideal gas, $\Delta U = \tfrac{3}{2} n R \Delta T$ — it depends only on $\Delta T$.

    A pressure-volume graph with four lines from one common starting point: a horizontal line (constant pressure), a vertical line (constant volume), a curve falling to the right (isothermal, with T constant), and a steeper curve below it (adiabatic, with no heat flow)
    The four standard processes, all starting from the same state
    Process What stays constant $\Delta U$ $W$ (on gas) $q$
    Isothermal $T$ $0$ $W$ $-W$
    Constant volume $V$ $\tfrac{3}{2}n R \Delta T$ $0$ $\Delta U$
    Constant pressure $p$ $\tfrac{3}{2}n R \Delta T$ $-p \Delta V$ $\Delta U - W$
    Adiabatic (no heat) varies $W$ $0$

    Read each row with the first law $\Delta U = q + W$:

    • Isothermal 等温 (constant $T$): $\Delta T = 0$, so $\Delta U = 0$. Then $q = -W$ — any heat that goes in comes straight back out as work.
    • Adiabatic 绝热 (no heat flow): $q = 0$, so $\Delta U = W$. The gas warms up only because work is done on it.
    • Constant volume (sealed rigid container): no work is done ($\Delta V = 0$), so all the heat goes into internal energy: $q = \Delta U$.
    • Constant pressure (gas pushing a piston 活塞): the gas does work as it expands, so the heat you supply does two jobs — it raises the internal energy and does the expansion work.

    Worked example: two-step process

    A sample of ideal gas at temperature $T$ with internal energy $U$ goes through:

    1. compression to temperature $3T$; work $W$ is done on the gas.
    2. cooling at constant volume to temperature $2T$.
    A bar chart of internal energy at three states: height U at temperature T (start), rising to 3U after step 1 compresses the gas to 3T, then falling to 2U after step 2 cools it at constant volume to 2T
    Internal energy tracks temperature: $U \to 3U$ on compressing to $3T$, then $3U \to 2U$ on cooling to $2T$

    Step 1 ($T \to 3T$): $U = \tfrac{3}{2}nRT$, so $U \to 3U$, giving $\Delta U_{1} = 2U$. $W_{1} = +W$. So $q_{1} = \Delta U_{1} - W_{1} = 2U - W$.

    Step 2 ($3T \to 2T$, constant volume): $\Delta U_{2} = -U$. $W_{2} = 0$. So $q_{2} = -U$ (heat flows out).

    Check: total $\Delta U = 2U - U = U$, taking the gas from $T$ to $2T$ ($U \to 2U$) — consistent.

    Heat capacity at constant volume

    For constant-volume heating of an ideal gas, $q = \Delta U = \tfrac{3}{2} n R \Delta T$. So the molar heat capacity 热容 at constant volume is $\tfrac{3}{2} R$ for a monatomic 单原子 ideal gas. (You are not required to use the symbol $C_V$, but the result $q = \tfrac{3}{2} n R \Delta T$ for constant-volume heating is.)

    Two containers. Constant volume: a sealed rigid box heated from below; no work is done so all the heat raises the internal energy. Constant pressure: a box with a free piston on top that moves out as it is heated, so the heat raises the internal energy and also does work
    At constant volume all the heat raises $U$ ($q = \Delta U$); at constant pressure the gas also does work

    Heating without a temperature change

    If heat is supplied during a phase change at constant pressure (e.g. boiling water), the temperature stays constant but the internal energy still rises (the latent heat 潜热 separates the molecules), and the gas does expansion work. The first law still holds: $\Delta U = q + W$.

    Explore

    Work done on a gas

    Push the piston in and you do work on the gas (W = pΔV); the first law says that work plus the heat added equals the rise in internal energy.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    first law of thermodynamics 热力学第一定律 rè lì xué dì yí dìng lǜ
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    isothermal 等温 děng wēn
    adiabatic 绝热 jué rè
    piston 活塞 huó sāi
    heat capacity 热容 rè róng
    monatomic 单原子 dān yuán zi
    latent heat 潜热 qián rè
    16.2

    Exam tips

    • First law: $\Delta U = q + W$ — be careful with the sign convention ($W$ is the work done on the gas).
    • For an ideal gas, internal energy depends only on temperature ($\Delta U \propto \Delta T$).
    • Work done by a gas at constant pressure $= p\Delta V$; read the sign from expansion (by) or compression (on).
  • 17 Oscillations
    17.1

    Simple harmonic motion: definition

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the terms displacement, amplitude, period, frequency, angular frequency and phase difference in the context of oscillations, and express the period in terms of both frequency and angular frequency
    2. understand that simple harmonic motion occurs when acceleration is proportional to displacement from a fixed point and in the opposite direction
    3. use $a = -\omega^2 x$ and recall and use, as a solution to this equation, $x = x_0 \sin \omega t$
    4. use the equations $v = v_0 \cos \omega t$ and $v = \pm \omega \sqrt{x_0^2 - x^2}$
    5. analyse and interpret graphical representations of the variations of displacement, velocity and acceleration for simple harmonic motion

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    SHM: spring, circle and graph in phase
    A pendulum clock
    A pendulum clock keeps time using simple harmonic motion.

    A particle moves with simple harmonic motion 简谐运动 (SHM) when its acceleration 加速度 is:

    • proportional to its displacement from a fixed equilibrium 平衡 point, and
    • directed back towards that point — opposite in sign to the displacement.

    The defining equation is

    $$a = -\omega^{2} x,$$

    where $x$ is the displacement 位移 from equilibrium and $\omega$ is a positive constant, the angular frequency 角频率. The minus sign means "directed back towards equilibrium".

    Many systems do this near a stable equilibrium: a mass on a spring 弹簧, a pendulum 单摆 (small swing), a floating block pushed down, the charge on a capacitor 电容器 in an LC circuit, atoms in a solid.

    A mass on a spring shown above and below the equilibrium line; in each case the acceleration arrow points back towards equilibrium, opposite to the displacement arrow
    Acceleration always points back towards equilibrium, opposite to the displacement

    Key terms

    • displacement $x$ — distance from equilibrium at a moment (a vector along the line of motion).
    • amplitude 振幅 $x_{0}$ — the largest displacement from equilibrium. Always positive.
    • period 周期 $T$ — the time for one full oscillation.
    • frequency 频率 $f$ — the number of oscillations per second; $f = 1/T$. Unit: Hz.
    • angular frequency $\omega$$\omega = 2\pi/T = 2\pi f$. Unit: $\text{rad s}^{-1}$.
    • phase difference 相位差 — the fraction of a cycle (in radians) by which one oscillation leads or lags another. A quarter-cycle apart is a phase difference of $\pi/2$.

    So $T = 2\pi/\omega$ and $f = \omega/(2\pi)$ — given any one of $\omega$, $f$, $T$ you can find the others.

    Worked example. A mass on a spring oscillates with SHM of amplitude $0.050\ \text{m}$ and frequency $2.5\ \text{Hz}$. Find its maximum acceleration.

    The angular frequency is $\omega = 2\pi f = 2\pi \times 2.5 = 15.7\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. The acceleration is largest at the extremes, where $|a| = \omega^{2}x_{0}$:

    $$a_{\text{max}} = \omega^{2}x_{0} = 15.7^{2} \times 0.050 \approx 12\ \text{m s}^{-2}.$$
    Explore

    Swing a pendulum

    Set it swinging, then change the start angle — the time for one swing stays the same (that is what makes it a good clock). Now make the string longer, or move to the Moon, and watch the period change.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    simple harmonic motion 简谐运动 jiǎn xié yùn dòng
    acceleration 加速度 jiā sù dù
    equilibrium 平衡 píng héng
    displacement 位移 wèi yí
    angular frequency 角频率 jiǎo pín lǜ
    spring 弹簧 tán huáng
    pendulum 单摆 dān bǎi
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    amplitude 振幅 zhèn fú
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    phase difference 相位差 xiàng wèi chà
    Exercise sheet
    17.1

    Displacement, velocity, acceleration in SHM

    If the particle starts at $x = 0$ moving in the positive direction at $t = 0$, then

    $$x = x_{0} \sin (\omega t).$$

    Differentiating once gives the velocity 速度:

    $$v = x_{0} \omega \cos(\omega t) = v_{0} \cos(\omega t),$$

    where $v_{0} = x_{0} \omega$ is the maximum speed (as the particle passes through equilibrium).

    Differentiating again gives the acceleration:

    $$a = -x_{0} \omega^{2} \sin(\omega t) = -\omega^{2} x,$$

    which is the SHM defining equation again. (If the particle instead starts at the extreme position $x = x_{0}$ at $t = 0$, use $x = x_{0} \cos(\omega t)$. Choose the one that fits the start conditions.)

    Velocity in terms of displacement

    A useful relation that does not use time:

    $$v = \pm \omega \sqrt{x_{0}^{2} - x^{2}}.$$
    • at equilibrium ($x = 0$): $v = \pm \omega x_{0}$ (maximum speed). Both signs, because the particle passes through equilibrium twice each cycle.
    • at the extremes ($x = \pm x_{0}$): $v = 0$ (at rest for an instant).

    Worked example. The same oscillation has amplitude $x_{0} = 0.050\ \text{m}$ and angular frequency $\omega = 15.7\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. Find the speed when the displacement is $x = 0.030\ \text{m}$.

    $$v = \omega\sqrt{x_{0}^{2} - x^{2}} = 15.7\sqrt{0.050^{2} - 0.030^{2}} = 15.7 \times 0.040 \approx 0.63\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Graphs against time

    For $x = x_{0}\sin\omega t$:

    • $x$ vs $t$ — a sine curve, amplitude $x_{0}$, period $T = 2\pi/\omega$.
    • $v$ vs $t$ — a cosine curve, leading $x$ by $\pi/2$, amplitude $\omega x_{0}$.
    • $a$ vs $t$ — a negative sine curve, out of phase with $x$ by $\pi$ (180°), amplitude $\omega^{2} x_{0}$.
    A displacement against time graph for simple harmonic motion: a sine curve of amplitude x0 starting from zero
    Displacement varies sinusoidally with time in simple harmonic motion
    Displacement, velocity and acceleration against time drawn as three stacked curves over one period; velocity is a cosine leading displacement by a quarter cycle and acceleration is a negative sine exactly out of phase with displacement, with dashed lines linking corresponding points
    Velocity leads displacement by a quarter cycle; acceleration is exactly out of phase with displacement

    Graph of $a$ against $x$

    A straight line through the origin with negative gradient $-\omega^{2}$. So you can read $\omega$ from the graph: gradient $= -\omega^{2}$, so $\omega = \sqrt{|\text{gradient}|}$, then $T = 2\pi / \omega$. This is a common exam pattern.

    A graph of acceleration against displacement: a straight line passing through the origin sloping downwards, with gradient minus omega squared
    The acceleration–displacement graph is a straight line through the origin with gradient $-\omega^{2}$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    17.2

    Energy in simple harmonic motion

    Syllabus
    1. describe the interchange between kinetic and potential energy during simple harmonic motion
    2. recall and use $E = \frac{1}{2}m\omega^2x_0^2$ for the total energy of a system undergoing simple harmonic motion

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A simple harmonic oscillator keeps swapping energy between two forms:

    • kinetic energy 动能 $E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v^{2}$.
    • potential energy $E_{\text{P}}$ (elastic for a spring, gravitational for a pendulum).

    With no damping 阻尼, the total energy is constant (this is conservation of energy 能量守恒).

    Maximum and minimum

    • at equilibrium ($x = 0$): $v$ is largest, so $E_{\text{K}}$ is largest and $E_{\text{P}}$ is smallest (zero, by choice).
    • at the extremes ($x = \pm x_{0}$): $v = 0$, so $E_{\text{K}} = 0$ and $E_{\text{P}}$ is largest.

    Total energy

    Using $v_{\text{max}} = \omega x_{0}$:

    $$E_{\text{total}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{max}}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} x_{0}^{2}.$$

    Two key facts: the total energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude (doubling $x_{0}$ gives four times the energy), and to $\omega^{2}$.

    Energy against displacement

    Using $v^{2} = \omega^{2}(x_{0}^{2} - x^{2})$:

    $$E_{\text{K}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} (x_{0}^{2} - x^{2}), \qquad E_{\text{P}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} x^{2}.$$

    So $E_{\text{K}}$ is a downward parabola (peak at $x = 0$, zero at $x = \pm x_{0}$) and $E_{\text{P}}$ is an upward parabola (zero at $x = 0$, largest at $x = \pm x_{0}$). Their sum is constant.

    A graph against displacement showing kinetic energy as a downward parabola, potential energy as an upward parabola, and their constant sum as a horizontal line for the total energy
    Kinetic and potential energy swap over a cycle while the total energy stays constant

    Worked example. A $0.20\ \text{kg}$ mass oscillates with amplitude $x_{0} = 0.050\ \text{m}$ and angular frequency $\omega = 15.7\ \text{rad s}^{-1}$. Find the total energy of the oscillation.

    The total energy equals the maximum kinetic energy, as the mass passes through $x = 0$ at $v_{\text{max}} = \omega x_{0}$:

    $$E = \tfrac{1}{2} m \omega^{2} x_{0}^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2}(0.20)(15.7)^{2}(0.050)^{2} \approx 0.062\ \text{J}.$$

    This stays constant, swapping between kinetic and potential form twice each cycle.

    Explore

    Energy in SHM

    Watch energy swap between kinetic and potential as the oscillator moves — fastest (max KE) at the centre, still (max PE) at the ends.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    damping 阻尼 zǔ ní
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    17.3

    Damped oscillations

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a resistive force acting on an oscillating system causes damping
    2. understand and use the terms light, critical and heavy damping and sketch displacement–time graphs illustrating these types of damping
    3. understand that resonance involves a maximum amplitude of oscillations and that this occurs when an oscillating system is forced to oscillate at its natural frequency

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A resistive force (friction 摩擦力, drag 阻力, air resistance 空气阻力) causes damping — the amplitude shrinks over time as energy is lost as heat. Three named cases:

    Light damping

    The amplitude shrinks slowly over many cycles (a light damping 轻阻尼 case). The system still oscillates near its natural frequency, but each cycle is smaller than the last. A car's suspension is light-to-medium damped, so bumps die away but the ride stays smooth.

    A displacement against time graph showing an oscillation whose amplitude slowly decreases, bounded by a smooth decaying envelope
    In light damping the amplitude dies away slowly over many cycles

    Critical damping

    The least damping that brings the system back to equilibrium without overshooting and without oscillating — a critical damping 临界阻尼 case. It returns in the shortest time. A galvanometer 检流计 or analogue voltmeter 电压表 is critically damped so the needle settles quickly.

    Heavy damping

    So much resistance that the system returns slowly, with no oscillation, but more slowly than the critical case — a heavy damping 过阻尼 case. A door with a strong closer is heavily damped.

    On a displacement–time graph: light damping is a wave whose size dies away smoothly; critical damping returns quickly with no overshoot; heavy damping returns slowly.

    A displacement against time graph comparing a critically damped curve that returns to equilibrium quickly without overshooting and an overdamped (heavily damped) curve that returns more slowly
    Critical damping returns to equilibrium fastest without overshoot; overdamping returns more slowly
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    friction 摩擦力 mó cā lì
    drag 阻力 zǔ lì
    air resistance 空气阻力 kōng qì zǔ lì
    light damping 轻阻尼 qīng zǔ ní
    critical damping 临界阻尼 lín jiè zǔ ní
    galvanometer 检流计 jiǎn liú jì
    voltmeter 电压表 diàn yā biǎo
    heavy damping 过阻尼 guò zǔ ní
    Exercise sheet
    17.3

    Forced oscillations and resonance

    Close-up of guitar strings
    A plucked guitar string vibrates at its resonant frequencies.

    A forced oscillation 受迫振动 is driven by an outside periodic force at a frequency $f_{\text{d}}$ chosen by the experimenter. The system then oscillates at this driving frequency 驱动频率 $f_{\text{d}}$, not at its own natural frequency. A plot of amplitude against $f_{\text{d}}$ is a resonance curve 共振曲线 with a peak.

    Resonance

    Resonance 共振 happens when the driving frequency equals the system's natural frequency 固有频率 $f_{0}$. At resonance the amplitude is largest and the energy transfer from the driver is most efficient.

    Resonance curves: amplitude plotted against driving frequency for light, medium and heavy damping, each rising to a peak near the natural frequency and falling away on either side; lighter damping gives a sharper, higher peak
    The amplitude of a forced oscillation peaks at resonance, when the driving frequency equals the natural frequency
    A black-and-white photograph of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge roadway twisted far over to one side while a man clings to it
    Resonance can destroy. In 1940 the wind pushed the Tacoma Narrows Bridge close to its natural frequency; with little damping the twisting grew and grew until the deck ripped apart. Engineers now design bridges and buildings so their natural frequencies avoid such driving forces

    Examples:

    • a swing pushed at the right rate builds up a large amplitude.
    • a wine glass broken by a sound at its natural ringing frequency.
    • a building shaken by an earthquake whose frequency matches a natural frequency — engineers design buildings so their natural frequencies avoid the main earthquake range.

    The peak's shape depends on damping: lighter damping → a sharper, higher peak; heavier damping → a broader, lower peak, shifted slightly to lower frequency.

    Explore

    Resonance

    Drive the swing at different frequencies. Far from its natural frequency it barely moves; tune them to match and the amplitude explodes — resonance, the same effect that can shake a bridge apart.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    forced oscillation 受迫振动 shòu pò zhèn dòng
    driving frequency 驱动频率 qū dòng pín lǜ
    resonance curve 共振曲线 gòng zhèn qū xiàn
    resonance 共振 gòng zhèn
    natural frequency 固有频率 gù yǒu pín lǜ
    17.3

    Exam tips

    • The SHM condition is $a = -\omega^2 x$ (acceleration proportional to displacement, directed back to equilibrium).
    • Learn $x = x_0\sin\omega t$ (or cos), $v_{max} = \omega x_0$, $a_{max} = \omega^2 x_0$; KE and PE interchange with the total energy constant.
    • Velocity is zero at the extremes and maximum at the centre.
    • Resonance occurs when the driving frequency equals the natural frequency; damping lowers and broadens the peak.
  • 18 Electric fields
    18.1

    Electric fields

    Syllabus
    1. understand that an electric field is an example of a field of force and define electric field as force per unit positive charge
    2. recall and use $F = qE$ for the force on a charge in an electric field
    3. represent an electric field by means of field lines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A lightning strike at night
    Lightning is a giant spark driven by a huge electric field.

    An electric field 电场 is a region where a charge feels a force from other charges. The electric field strength 电场强度 $E$ at a point is the force per unit positive charge on a small positive test charge 检验电荷 placed there:

    $$E = \frac{F}{q}.$$

    Unit: $\text{N C}^{-1}$ (the same as $\text{V m}^{-1}$, as we will see). $E$ is a vector 矢量, pointing the way the force acts on a positive charge. The force on a charge $q$ is

    $$F = qE,$$

    opposite to the field if $q$ is negative.

    Field lines

    • field lines 场线 point the way the force acts on a positive test charge.
    • lines start on positive charges and end on negative charges (or go to infinity).
    • lines never cross; closer lines mean a stronger field.

    Examples: a positive point charge 点电荷 has radial lines pointing out; a negative one has lines pointing in; two opposite charges (a dipole 偶极子) have lines curving from + to −; two parallel charged plates give a uniform field 匀强场 of equally spaced parallel lines.

    Four electric field-line patterns: a) uniform field between parallel plates, b) a dipole with lines curving from positive to negative, c) radial lines out from a positive point charge, d) a charged sphere above an earthed plate
    Field-line patterns for parallel plates, a dipole, a point charge, and a charged sphere above an earthed plate
    A Van de Graaff generator: a large polished metal dome on a clear column, with a moving rubber belt inside and a small discharge sphere on a stand beside it
    A Van de Graaff generator stores a large static charge on its metal dome, making a strong electric field around it
    Explore

    Electric fields

    E ∝ Q / r²

    A charge sets up a radial field — out for +, in for −, obeying the inverse-square law.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electric field 电场 diàn chǎng
    force
    electric field strength 电场强度 diàn chǎng qiáng dù
    test charge 检验电荷 jiǎn yàn diàn hè
    vector 矢量 shǐ liàng
    field line 场线 chǎng xiàn
    point charge 点电荷 diǎn diàn hè
    dipole 偶极子 ǒu jí zi
    uniform field 匀强场 yún qiáng chǎng
    Exercise sheet
    18.2

    Uniform electric fields

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $E = \Delta V / \Delta d$ to calculate the field strength of the uniform field between charged parallel plates
    2. describe the effect of a uniform electric field on the motion of charged particles

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Between two parallel plates a distance $d$ apart with potential difference 电势差 $V$ between them, the field is uniform (apart from edge effects) with size

    Between parallel plates a distance d apart with voltage V, the field is E = V/d
    Between parallel plates the field is uniform, E = V/d
    $$E = \frac{V}{d}.$$

    It points from the higher-potential plate to the lower one. The unit $\text{V m}^{-1}$ comes straight from this and equals $\text{N C}^{-1}$.

    Worked example. Two parallel plates $5.0\ \text{mm}$ apart have a p.d. of $200\ \text{V}$ between them. Find the field strength, and the force on an electron in the gap. ($e = 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$.)

    $$E = \frac{V}{d} = \frac{200}{5.0 \times 10^{-3}} = 4.0 \times 10^{4}\ \text{V m}^{-1}, \qquad F = qE = (1.6 \times 10^{-19})(4.0 \times 10^{4}) = 6.4 \times 10^{-15}\ \text{N}.$$

    A charged particle in a uniform field

    A charge $q$ in a uniform field feels a constant force $F = qE$, so a constant acceleration $a = qE/m$ — just like a mass in a uniform gravitational field.

    • released at rest, it speeds up along the field (positive charge) or against it (negative charge), gaining kinetic energy 动能.
    • entering at right angles to the field, it follows a parabolic 抛物线 path — like a projectile 抛体 in gravity. This is how a cathode-ray tube 阴极射线管 used to steer its beam.
    A charged particle entering the uniform field between two parallel plates at right angles to the field and curving into a parabolic path as it crosses
    A charge entering a uniform field at right angles follows a parabolic path, like a projectile
    Explore

    Uniform electric field lab

    Follow how a charge behaves between parallel plates.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chà
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    parabolic 抛物线 pāo wù xiàn
    projectile 抛体 pāo tǐ
    cathode-ray tube 阴极射线管 yīn jí shè xiàn guǎn
    18.3

    Coulomb's law

    Syllabus
    1. understand that, for a point outside a spherical conductor, the charge on the sphere may be considered to be a point charge at its centre
    2. recall and use Coulomb’s law $F = Q_1Q_2 / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^2)$ for the force between two point charges in free space

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    For two point charges $Q_{1}$ and $Q_{2}$ a distance $r$ apart in free space, each feels a force of size

    $$F = \frac{Q_{1} Q_{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}.$$

    This is Coulomb's law 库仑定律. Here $\varepsilon_{0} = 8.85 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{F m}^{-1}$ is the permittivity of free space 真空电容率, and $1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}) \approx 9.0 \times 10^{9}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{C}^{-2}$. The force is along the line joining the charges: repulsive for like charges, attractive for opposite charges.

    Coulomb's law direction: two like charges (both positive) are pushed apart; a positive and a negative charge are pulled together
    Like charges repel; opposite charges attract — the force is along the line joining them

    Worked example. Find the electrostatic force between point charges of $+2.0\ \text{nC}$ and $+3.0\ \text{nC}$ placed $4.0\ \text{cm}$ apart. ($1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}) = 9.0 \times 10^{9}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{C}^{-2}$.)

    $$F = \frac{Q_{1}Q_{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} = \frac{(9.0 \times 10^{9})(2.0 \times 10^{-9})(3.0 \times 10^{-9})}{(0.040)^{2}} \approx 3.4 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{N (repulsive).}$$

    Spheres treated as point charges

    A spherical conductor 导体 with total charge $Q$ gives, at any point outside, the same field as a point charge $Q$ at its centre (measure $r$ from the centre). Inside a hollow charged conductor the field is zero, so the conductor is an equipotential 等势面.

    Explore

    Coulomb's law

    F ∝ Qq / r²

    Like charges repel, unlike attract — and the force follows 1/r².

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    Coulomb's law 库仑定律 kù lún dìng lǜ
    permittivity of free space 真空电容率 zhēn kōng diàn róng lǜ
    conductor 导体 dǎo tǐ
    equipotential 等势面 děng shì miàn
    18.4

    Electric field due to a point charge

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use $E = Q / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^2)$ for the electric field strength due to a point charge in free space

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Coulomb's law gives the force between two charges. Divide it by the test charge ($E = F/q$) and you are left with the field of the source charge $Q$ alone. The field at distance $r$ from a point charge $Q$ is

    $$E = \frac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}.$$

    It points out from a positive $Q$, in towards a negative $Q$, and falls as $1/r^{2}$ — just like gravitational field 重力场 strength, except gravity is always attractive. For several charges, add the fields as a vector sum 矢量和.

    Explore

    Field around a point charge

    Change the charge. Field lines point away from positive and toward negative, and crowd together where the field is strongest.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    gravitational field 重力场 zhòng lì chǎng
    vector sum 矢量和 shǐ liàng hé
    Exercise sheet
    18.5

    Electric potential

    Syllabus
    1. define electric potential at a point as the work done per unit positive charge in bringing a small test charge from infinity to the point
    2. recall and use the fact that the electric field at a point is equal to the negative of potential gradient at that point
    3. use $V = Q / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r)$ for the electric potential in the field due to a point charge
    4. understand how the concept of electric potential leads to the electric potential energy of two point charges and use $E_P = Qq / (4\pi\varepsilon_0 r)$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electric potential 电势 $V$ at a point is the work done per unit positive charge in bringing a small positive test charge from infinity 无穷远 to that point:

    $$V = \frac{W}{q}.$$

    Unit: $\text{V}$. The potential is zero at infinity. For a positive source charge $V > 0$ everywhere outside; for a negative source charge $V < 0$.

    Potential due to a point charge

    $$V = \frac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r}.$$

    Note the $1/r$ here (compared with $1/r^{2}$ for the field). $V$ is a scalar 标量; for several charges, add the potentials (with sign).

    Worked example. Find the electric potential $4.0\ \text{cm}$ from a point charge of $+3.0\ \text{nC}$. ($1/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}) = 9.0 \times 10^{9}\ \text{N m}^{2}\ \text{C}^{-2}$.)

    $$V = \frac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r} = \frac{(9.0 \times 10^{9})(3.0 \times 10^{-9})}{0.040} \approx 6.8 \times 10^{2}\ \text{V}.$$

    Because potential is a scalar, the potential from several charges is simply their sum (each with its own sign) — no directions to resolve.

    Two 1/r curves of potential V against distance r from a point charge on one axis: a positive source charge gives a positive potential falling towards zero, a negative source charge gives a negative potential rising towards zero
    The potential near a point charge varies as 1/r — positive for a positive charge, negative for a negative one

    Link between field and potential

    The field equals the negative potential gradient 电势梯度:

    $$E = -\frac{dV}{dx}.$$

    Between parallel plates $V$ changes evenly with position, giving $E = V/d$ as before. The minus sign means the field points towards lower potential. For a point charge, $-\dfrac{dV}{dr} = \dfrac{Q}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} = E$.

    Two graphs against distance for a uniform field: a) potential falling steadily from +V to zero with gradient minus V over d, b) the field strength constant at V over d
    In a uniform field the potential falls steadily with distance, so the field strength $V/d$ is constant

    Electric potential energy

    A charge $q$ at a point of potential $V$ has electric potential energy 电势能 $E_{\text{P}} = qV$. For two point charges $Q$ and $q$ a distance $r$ apart:

    $$E_{\text{P}} = \frac{Qq}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r}.$$
    • like charges: $E_{\text{P}} > 0$ — stored energy that would be released if they flew apart.
    • opposite charges: $E_{\text{P}} < 0$ — a bound 束缚 system; energy must be supplied to separate them.

    In both cases $E_{\text{P}} \to 0$ as $r \to \infty$.

    Electric potential energy against separation: like charges give a positive curve falling towards zero (energy released if they fly apart); opposite charges give a negative curve rising towards zero — a bound well that needs energy supplied to separate them
    Electric PE of two charges: positive for like charges, a negative well for opposite charges

    Worked-example pattern

    An electron 电子 orbits a nucleus 原子核 of charge $+Ze$ at distance $r$. The Coulomb attraction provides the centripetal force 向心力:

    $$\frac{Z e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} = \frac{m_{e} v^{2}}{r}, \qquad v = \sqrt{\frac{Z e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} m_{e} r}}.$$

    The total energy is kinetic plus potential:

    $$E_{\text{total}} = \tfrac{1}{2} m_{e} v^{2} - \frac{Z e^{2}}{4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r} = -\frac{Z e^{2}}{8\pi\varepsilon_{0} r},$$

    which is negative (a bound state).

    Gravitational versus electric

    The two field theories look alike:

    Quantity Gravitational Electric
    Source mass $M$ (always positive) charge $Q$ (can be ±)
    Field strength $g = GM/r^{2}$ $E = Q/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r^{2})$
    Force on test object $F = mg$ $F = qE$
    Potential $\phi = -GM/r$ $V = Q/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r)$
    PE of two $-GMm/r$ $Qq/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r)$
    Nature always attractive attractive or repulsive

    The minus sign in the gravitational potential 引力势 reflects that gravity is always attractive; the electric potential takes the sign of the source charge.

    Explore

    Electric potential

    V = kQ / r

    Potential ∝ 1/r around a charge — steep near it, flattening out.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    electric potential 电势 diàn shì
    infinity 无穷远 wú qióng yuǎn
    scalar 标量 biāo liàng
    potential gradient 电势梯度 diàn shì tī dù
    electric potential energy 电势能 diàn shì néng
    bound 束缚 shù fù
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    gravitational potential 引力势 yǐn lì shì
    18.5

    Exam tips

    • Coulomb's law $F = Q_1 Q_2 / 4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^2$ (inverse-square, but can attract or repel).
    • Distinguish a uniform field ($E = V/d$, between plates) from a radial field ($E = Q/4\pi\varepsilon_0 r^2$).
    • Electric potential $V = Q/4\pi\varepsilon_0 r$ (sign follows the charge); the field points from high to low potential.
  • 19 Capacitance
    19.1

    Capacitance

    Syllabus
    1. define capacitance, as applied to both isolated spherical conductors and to parallel plate capacitors
    2. recall and use $C = Q/V$
    3. derive, using $C = Q/V$, formulae for the combined capacitance of capacitors in series and in parallel
    4. use the capacitance formulae for capacitors in series and in parallel

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electrolytic capacitors on a circuit board
    Capacitors store electric charge in a circuit.

    A capacitor 电容器 stores charge. The simplest one is two parallel conductor 导体 plates with an insulator 绝缘体 (a dielectric 电介质, or just vacuum 真空 / air) between them. Connected to a battery, charge $+Q$ builds up on one plate and $-Q$ on the other, with a potential difference 电势差 $V$ across the gap.

    A parallel-plate capacitor: a plate with charge +Q and a plate with charge -Q separated by an insulating dielectric, connected to a battery that gives a potential difference V across the gap
    A parallel-plate capacitor: equal and opposite charges on two plates with a p.d. $V$ across the gap

    The capacitance 电容 $C$ of any capacitor (or any isolated conductor) is

    $$C = \frac{Q}{V}.$$

    This applies to:

    • an isolated sphere holding charge $Q$ at potential $V$ (zero at infinity). For radius $r$, $V = Q/(4\pi\varepsilon_{0}r)$, so $C = 4\pi\varepsilon_{0} r$.
    • a parallel-plate capacitor: charges $\pm Q$ on the plates, p.d. $V$ between them.

    Unit: farad 法拉 (F) $= \text{C V}^{-1}$. A farad is huge, so real capacitors run from $\text{pF}$ to $\text{mF}$.

    Capacitance is constant for a given capacitor (set by its size and dielectric). Doubling the charge doubles the voltage, so $C = Q/V$ stays the same.

    Worked example. A $100\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor is charged to $12\ \text{V}$. Find the charge stored.

    $$Q = CV = (100 \times 10^{-6})(12) = 1.2 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{C}\ (= 1.2\ \text{mC}).$$
    Several real capacitors of very different sizes: four large metal electrolytic cans standing upright, and a row of much smaller film and ceramic capacitors below, with a ruler for scale
    Real capacitors range from large electrolytic cans (high capacitance) down to tiny film and ceramic types -- from pF up to mF

    Combining capacitors

    Capacitors in parallel share the same p.d. $V$. The total charge is the sum:

    $$Q_{\text{total}} = C_{1} V + C_{2} V + \ldots, \qquad\text{so}\qquad C_{\text{parallel}} = C_{1} + C_{2} + \ldots$$

    A parallel combination has larger capacitance than any one capacitor.

    Two capacitors C1 and C2 connected side by side across the same potential difference V, with charges q1 and q2 adding to Q, equivalent to a single capacitor C
    Capacitors in parallel share the same p.d.; the charges add

    Capacitors in series carry the same charge $Q$. The total p.d. is the sum:

    $$V_{\text{total}} = \frac{Q}{C_{1}} + \frac{Q}{C_{2}} + \ldots, \qquad\text{so}\qquad \frac{1}{C_{\text{series}}} = \frac{1}{C_{1}} + \frac{1}{C_{2}} + \ldots$$

    A series combination has smaller capacitance than any one capacitor.

    Two capacitors C1 and C2 connected in a line carrying the same charge Q, with p.d.s V1 and V2 adding to V, equivalent to a single capacitor C
    Capacitors in series carry the same charge; the p.d.s add

    Note: these rules are the opposite of those for resistors (resistors sum in series; capacitors sum in parallel), because $C = Q/V$ has $V$ on the bottom while $R = V/I$ has $I$ on the bottom.

    Explore

    Capacitance

    Q = C·V

    Charge stored is proportional to voltage — the gradient is the capacitance C.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    conductor 导体 dǎo tǐ
    insulator 绝缘体 jué yuán tǐ
    dielectric 电介质 diàn jiè zhì
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chà
    capacitance 电容 diàn róng
    farad 法拉 fǎ lā
    Exercise sheet
    19.2

    Energy stored in a capacitor

    Syllabus
    1. determine the electric potential energy stored in a capacitor from the area under the potential–charge graph
    2. recall and use $W = \frac{1}{2}QV = \frac{1}{2}CV^2$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Charging a capacitor from $0$ to $Q$ needs work, because each extra bit of charge is pushed against the p.d. already there. When the charge is $q$, the p.d. is $V(q) = q/C$, so adding a small charge $dq$ needs work $V\,dq$. The total work is

    $$W = \int_{0}^{Q} \frac{q}{C}\, dq = \frac{Q^{2}}{2 C}.$$

    Using $V = Q/C$, this is the energy 能量 stored:

    $$W = \tfrac{1}{2} Q V = \tfrac{1}{2} C V^{2} = \frac{Q^{2}}{2C}.$$

    Worked example. Find the energy stored in a $100\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor charged to $12\ \text{V}$.

    $$W = \tfrac{1}{2}CV^{2} = \tfrac{1}{2}(100 \times 10^{-6})(12)^{2} = 7.2 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{J}\ (= 7.2\ \text{mJ}).$$

    Reading the $Q$$V$ graph

    A plot of $V$ against $Q$ is a straight line through the origin with gradient $1/C$. The energy stored is the area under the line up to a given charge $Q$, which is the triangle $\tfrac{1}{2} Q V$. The factor $\tfrac{1}{2}$ is there because the average p.d. during charging is $V/2$ (it grows from zero to $V$), not $V$.

    A graph of potential difference against charge: a straight line through the origin, with the triangle beneath it up to charge Q0 shaded as the stored energy half Q0 V0
    The energy stored is the area under the potential–charge line (the triangle $\tfrac{1}{2}QV$)

    Why charging is "half efficient"

    Connect a capacitor $C$ to an ideal battery of e.m.f. $V$ through a wire. The capacitor stores $\tfrac{1}{2} C V^{2}$, but the battery supplies charge $Q = CV$ at e.m.f. $V$, giving out $QV = CV^{2}$. The other half is lost as heat in the wire — whatever the wire's resistance.

    Explore

    Energy in a capacitor

    E = ½C·V²

    Stored energy grows with the square of the voltage.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    Exercise sheet
    19.3

    Capacitor discharging through a resistor

    Syllabus
    1. analyse graphs of the variation with time of potential difference, charge and current for a capacitor discharging through a resistor
    2. recall and use $\tau = RC$ for the time constant for a capacitor discharging through a resistor
    3. use equations of the form $x = x_0 e^{-(t/RC)}$ where $x$ could represent current, charge or potential difference for a capacitor discharging through a resistor

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A capacitor $C$ charged to $V_{0}$ is connected through a switch to a resistor 电阻器 of resistance 电阻 $R$. When the switch closes at $t = 0$, the capacitor discharges.

    A circuit with a supply of e.m.f. V0, a two-way switch with positions A and B, a capacitor in the middle branch and a resistor in series with an ammeter; position A charges the capacitor and position B discharges it through the resistor
    A capacitor charges through switch A, then discharges through the resistor via switch B

    Setting up the equation

    By Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 around the loop, $V_{C} = V_{R}$. Using $V_{C} = Q/C$, $V_{R} = IR$ and $I = -dQ/dt$:

    $$\frac{Q}{C} = -R \frac{dQ}{dt}.$$

    This is solved by an exponential decay 指数衰减 with time constant $RC$.

    Discharge equations

    Charge $Q$, p.d. $V$ and current $I$ all decay exponentially with the same time constant:

    $$Q = Q_{0} e^{-t / (RC)}, \qquad V = V_{0} e^{-t / (RC)}, \qquad I = I_{0} e^{-t / (RC)},$$

    with $I_{0} = V_{0}/R$.

    A graph of charge against time during discharge: an exponential decay curve starting at Q0 and falling to Q0/e at time equal to RC
    Charge decays exponentially during discharge, falling to $Q_0/e$ after one time constant $RC$

    Time constant

    $$\tau = RC$$

    is the time constant 时间常数 (in seconds: $\Omega \cdot \text{F} = \text{s}$). It is the time for a decaying quantity to fall to $1/e \approx 0.37$ (about 37%) of its starting value. After $2\tau$ it is at about 13.5%; after $5\tau$, below 1%.

    Worked example. A $100\ \mu\text{F}$ capacitor charged to $12\ \text{V}$ is discharged through a $47\ \text{k}\Omega$ resistor. Find the time constant and the voltage after one time constant.

    $$\tau = RC = (47 \times 10^{3})(100 \times 10^{-6}) = 4.7\ \text{s}.$$

    After one time constant the voltage falls to $1/e$ of its start: $V = 12 \times 0.37 \approx 4.4\ \text{V}$.

    To find $\tau$ from a curve: read the time to fall to $1/e$ of the start. Or take logs: $\ln(V/V_{0}) = -t/(RC)$, so a plot of $\ln V$ against $t$ is a straight line with gradient $-1/(RC)$.

    A graph of natural-log of voltage against time during discharge: the data lie on a straight line of gradient minus one over RC, used to find the time constant
    A graph of $\ln V$ against time is a straight line of gradient $-1/(RC)$

    Reading graphs during discharge

    • $Q$ against $V_{C}$: since $Q = C V$ always, this is a straight line through the origin with gradient $C$. Discharge moves the point from $(V_{0}, Q_{0})$ down to $(0,0)$.
    • $I$ against $V_{C}$: since $I = V_{C}/R$, this is a straight line through the origin with gradient $1/R$, so you can find $R$.

    Common exam questions

    Given a discharge curve $V(t)$ or $Q(t)$:

    • read the start value $V_{0}$ or $Q_{0}$ at $t = 0$.
    • read the time to fall to $V_{0}/e$ → time constant $\tau = RC$.
    • given $R$, find $C = \tau / R$ (or the other way round).
    • predict a later value with the exponential formula.
    Explore

    Charge / discharge curve

    The voltage rises (or decays) exponentially with time constant τ = RC.

    Explore

    Discharging a capacitor

    Q = Q₀·b

    Charge decays exponentially through the resistor.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    resistor 电阻器 diàn zǔ qì
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    Kirchhoff's second law 基尔霍夫第二定律 jī ěr huò fū dì èr dìng lǜ
    exponential decay 指数衰减 zhǐ shù shuāi jiǎn
    time constant 时间常数 shí jiān cháng shù
    Exercise sheet
    19.3

    Exam tips

    • $C = Q/V$; energy stored $W = \frac{1}{2}QV = \frac{1}{2}CV^2$ (the $\frac{1}{2}$ is the area under the $Q$-$V$ graph).
    • Combine capacitors the opposite way to resistors (parallel add, series reciprocal).
    • Discharge is exponential: $Q = Q_0 e^{-t/RC}$; the time constant $\tau = RC$ is when the charge falls to $37\%$.
  • 20 Magnetic fields
    20.1

    The magnetic field

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a magnetic field is an example of a field of force produced either by moving charges or by permanent magnets
    2. represent a magnetic field by field lines

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Iron filings around bar magnets
    Iron filings trace the field lines around bar magnets.

    A magnetic field 磁场 is a region where a moving charge (or a current 电流) feels a force. It is made by:

    • moving charges (usually a current in a wire), or
    • permanent magnets 永磁体 (where it comes from tiny atomic currents).

    Field lines

    • field lines 场线 point from N to S outside a magnet, and S to N inside (so they form closed loops).
    • lines never cross; closer lines mean a stronger field.
    Curved magnetic field lines run from the N pole to the S pole outside a bar magnet, closer together near the poles
    The field of a bar magnet: lines run from N to S, strongest near the poles
    Hundreds of tiny iron filings sprinkled on paper around a bar magnet, lined up into curved lines that join the N and S poles
    Iron filings around a bar magnet line up along the field, showing its real shape

    Patterns to know:

    • bar magnet 条形磁铁 — curved lines from N to S outside, strongest near the poles.
    • long straight wire — circles around the wire; the direction comes from the right-hand grip rule 右手定则 (thumb along the current, fingers curl the way the field points).
    • flat circular coil — the field through the centre is at right angles to the coil; the coil acts like a small bar magnet.
    • long solenoid 螺线管 — the field inside is nearly uniform along the axis, like a stretched bar magnet; outside it falls off fast.
    Concentric circular magnetic field lines around a straight current-carrying wire, with the current going into the page
    Field around a long straight wire
    Magnetic field lines of a solenoid: uniform and parallel inside, spreading out at the ends like a bar magnet, with N and S ends marked
    Field of a solenoid

    An iron core 铁芯 inside a solenoid greatly increases the field, because the iron's atomic magnets line up and add to it. This is why electromagnets 电磁铁 and transformers 变压器 have iron cores.

    Explore

    Magnetic field lab

    Move between magnetic arrangements and see how field patterns change.

    Explore

    Current field rule lab

    Connect current direction to the circular magnetic field around a wire.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    magnetic field 磁场 cí chǎng
    current 电流 diàn liú
    force
    permanent magnet 永磁体 yǒng cí tǐ
    field line 场线 chǎng xiàn
    bar magnet 条形磁铁 tiáo xíng cí tiě
    right-hand grip rule 右手定则 yòu shǒu dìng zé
    solenoid 螺线管 luó xiàn guǎn
    iron core 铁芯 tiě xīn
    electromagnet 电磁铁 diàn cí tiě
    transformer 变压器 biàn yā qì
    Exercise sheet
    20.2

    Force on a current-carrying conductor

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a force might act on a current-carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field
    2. recall and use the equation $F = BIL \sin \theta$, with directions as interpreted by Fleming's left-hand rule
    3. define magnetic flux density as the force acting per unit current per unit length on a wire placed at right-angles to the magnetic field

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A current $I$ in a wire of length $L$ in a magnetic field of flux density $B$ feels a force

    $$F = B I L \sin\theta,$$

    where $\theta$ is the angle between the wire and the field. The force is largest when the wire is at right angles to the field ($F = BIL$) and zero when the wire is along the field.

    Worked example. A wire of length $0.20\ \text{m}$ carries a current of $3.0\ \text{A}$ at right angles to a magnetic field of flux density $0.50\ \text{T}$. Find the force on it.

    $$F = BIL = 0.50 \times 3.0 \times 0.20 = 0.30\ \text{N}.$$

    Magnetic flux density

    This equation also defines the magnetic flux density 磁通密度 $B$:

    $$B = \frac{F}{IL} \quad\text{(wire at right angles to the field).}$$

    So $B$ is the force per unit current per unit length on a wire at right angles to the field. Unit: tesla 特斯拉, $\text{T} = \text{N A}^{-1}\ \text{m}^{-1}$.

    Direction — Fleming's left-hand rule

    Use the left hand (Fleming's left-hand rule 弗莱明左手定则): first finger = Field, second finger = Current, thumb = force (thrust). Hold the three at right angles.

    Three mutually perpendicular arrows from one point: thumb is force or motion, first finger is field, second finger is current
    Fleming's left-hand rule: thumb = force, first finger = field, second finger = current
    Explore

    Feel the force on the wire

    A current in a magnetic field feels a force F = BIL at right angles to both — reverse the current or flip the magnet and the force jumps the other way.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    magnetic flux density 磁通密度 cí tōng mì dù
    tesla 特斯拉 tè sī lā
    Fleming's left-hand rule 弗莱明左手定则 fú lái míng zuǒ shǒu dìng zé
    20.3

    Force on a moving charge

    Syllabus
    1. determine the direction of the force on a charge moving in a magnetic field
    2. recall and use $F = BQv \sin \theta$
    3. understand the origin of the Hall voltage and derive and use the expression $V_{\text{H}} = BI / (ntq)$, where $t = \text{thickness}$
    4. understand the use of a Hall probe to measure magnetic flux density
    5. describe the motion of a charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of motion of the particle
    6. explain how electric and magnetic fields can be used in velocity selection

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    A charge $Q$ moving at velocity 速度 $v$ through a field feels

    $$F = B Q v \sin\theta,$$

    with $\theta$ the angle between $v$ and $B$. Same left-hand rule (the second finger is the motion of a positive charge — reverse it for a negative charge). The force is largest when $v$ is at right angles to $B$, and zero when $v$ is along $B$.

    Circular motion in a uniform field

    A charge moving at right angles to a uniform field 匀强场 feels a force at right angles to both $v$ and $B$. This force does no work (always at right angles to the motion), so the kinetic energy 动能 and speed stay constant — the particle moves in a circle. Set the magnetic force equal to the centripetal force 向心力:

    $$B Q v = \frac{m v^{2}}{r}, \qquad r = \frac{m v}{B Q}.$$

    Worked example. A proton (mass $1.7 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$, charge $1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$) moves at $2.0 \times 10^{6}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ at right angles to a $0.50\ \text{T}$ field. Find the radius of its circular path.

    $$r = \frac{mv}{BQ} = \frac{(1.7 \times 10^{-27})(2.0 \times 10^{6})}{(0.50)(1.6 \times 10^{-19})} \approx 0.043\ \text{m}.$$

    So the radius depends on the momentum 动量 $mv$. The period is

    $$T = \frac{2\pi m}{B Q},$$

    which does not depend on the speed — a faster particle goes in a bigger circle but takes the same time per turn. If $v$ also has a part along $B$, that part is unchanged, and the path is a helix 螺旋.

    A positive charge in a uniform magnetic field into the page follows a circular path, with the magnetic force always pointing to the centre
    Circular path of a charged particle in a magnetic field

    Hall effect

    A slab of conductor carrying current $I$, in a field $B$ at right angles to the current, develops a voltage across its faces — the Hall voltage 霍尔电压 $V_{\text{H}}$ (the Hall effect 霍尔效应).

    The moving charges feel a magnetic force $BQv_{\text{d}}$ ($v_{\text{d}}$ is the drift velocity 漂移速度), so they build up on one face, making an electric field 电场 $E$ that opposes more build-up. At steady state $eE = Bev_{\text{d}}$, so $E = B v_{\text{d}}$. With $V_{\text{H}} = E w$ and $I = n e v_{\text{d}} w t$:

    $$V_{\text{H}} = \frac{B I}{n t q},$$

    where $q$ is the carrier charge. A Hall probe 霍尔探头 uses this to measure $B$: pass a known current through a thin semiconductor 半导体 slab and read $V_{\text{H}}$ (largest when the slab is at right angles to $B$).

    A current-carrying slab in a magnetic field into the page: charges build up on opposite faces, creating the Hall voltage across them
    The Hall effect

    Velocity selector

    A velocity selector 速度选择器 uses crossed electric and magnetic fields to let through only one speed. With the electric force $qE$ and magnetic force $qvB$ set to oppose each other, the net force is zero only when

    $$qE = qvB \quad\Rightarrow\quad v = \frac{E}{B}.$$

    Particles at speed $E/B$ go straight through; faster or slower ones are deflected.

    Charged particles passing through crossed electric and magnetic fields; only those with v = E/B travel straight through the slit, while faster and slower ones are deflected
    Velocity selector
    Explore

    Force on a moving charge

    F = BQv

    The magnetic force on a charge is proportional to its speed (for a fixed field and charge).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    velocity 速度 sù dù
    uniform field 匀强场 yún qiáng chǎng
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    centripetal force 向心力 xiàng xīn lì
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    helix 螺旋 luó xuán
    Hall voltage 霍尔电压 huò ěr diàn yā
    Hall effect 霍尔效应 huò ěr xiào yìng
    drift velocity 漂移速度 piāo yí sù dù
    electric field 电场 diàn chǎng
    Hall probe 霍尔探头 huò ěr tàn tóu
    semiconductor 半导体 bàn dǎo tǐ
    velocity selector 速度选择器 sù dù xuǎn zé qì
    20.4

    Force between parallel currents

    Syllabus
    1. sketch magnetic field patterns due to the currents in a long straight wire, a flat circular coil and a long solenoid
    2. understand that the magnetic field due to the current in a solenoid is increased by a ferrous core
    3. explain the origin of the forces between current-carrying conductors and determine the direction of the forces

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Two long parallel wires each sit in the other's magnetic field. Using Fleming's left-hand rule: parallel currents (same direction) attract; antiparallel currents (opposite directions) repel. This is the basis of the SI definition of the ampere.

    Exercise sheet
    20.5

    Electromagnetic induction

    Syllabus
    1. define magnetic flux as the product of the magnetic flux density and the cross-sectional area perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic flux density
    2. recall and use $\Phi = BA$
    3. understand and use the concept of magnetic flux linkage
    4. understand and explain experiments that demonstrate: • that a changing magnetic flux can induce an e.m.f. in a circuit • that the induced e.m.f. is in such a direction as to oppose the change producing it • the factors affecting the magnitude of the induced e.m.f.
    5. recall and use Faraday's and Lenz's laws of electromagnetic induction

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The transformer: turns ratio
    Electromagnetic induction

    Magnetic flux

    The magnetic flux 磁通量 $\Phi$ through a flat area $A$ at right angles to $B$ is

    $$\Phi = B A.$$

    If the area's normal is at angle $\theta$ to $B$, use $\Phi = B A \cos\theta$. Unit: weber 韦伯, $\text{Wb} = \text{T m}^{2}$. For a coil 线圈 of $N$ turns, the flux linkage 磁链 is $N\Phi = N B A$.

    Faraday's and Lenz's laws

    When the flux linkage through a circuit changes, an electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) is induced — this is electromagnetic induction 电磁感应.

    Faraday's law 法拉第定律: the induced e.m.f. equals the rate of change of flux linkage:

    $$|\varepsilon| = N\frac{d\Phi}{dt}.$$

    Worked example. A coil of $200$ turns and area $0.010\ \text{m}^{2}$ sits with its plane at right angles to a $0.50\ \text{T}$ field. The field falls steadily to zero in $0.20\ \text{s}$. Find the average induced e.m.f.

    The flux linkage changes from $N\Phi = NBA = 200 \times 0.50 \times 0.010 = 1.0\ \text{Wb}$ to zero, so

    $$|\varepsilon| = \frac{\Delta(N\Phi)}{\Delta t} = \frac{1.0}{0.20} = 5.0\ \text{V}.$$

    Lenz's law 楞次定律: the induced e.m.f. acts to oppose the change that makes it. This is conservation of energy 能量守恒 — if it reinforced the change, energy would come from nothing. Combined:

    $$\varepsilon = -\frac{d(N\Phi)}{dt}.$$

    What changes the flux?

    • changing $B$ (moving a magnet near a coil),
    • changing area $A$ (a rod sliding along rails),
    • changing orientation (a coil turning in a field — the a.c. generator, next topic).

    Demonstrations

    • moving a bar magnet into a coil deflects a galvanometer 检流计; the deflection reverses when the magnet is pulled out (Lenz's law), and is larger for faster motion (Faraday's law).
    A bar magnet is pushed into a coil connected to a sensitive galvanometer, inducing an e.m.f. that deflects the needle
    Demonstrating electromagnetic induction
    • a copper disc swinging into a field is quickly slowed — eddy currents 涡流 are induced that oppose the motion.
    A metal plate swinging between the poles of a magnet is rapidly slowed as eddy currents are induced in it that oppose the motion
    Eddy-current damping

    What makes the induced e.m.f. larger

    From $\varepsilon = N\,d\Phi/dt$ with $\Phi = BA$: more turns $N$, a stronger $B$, a larger area $A$, or a faster change — each gives a larger induced e.m.f.

    Explore

    Electromagnetic induction

    Move the magnet through the coil — a current is induced only while the field is changing. Faster gives more current; flip the magnet to reverse it.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    magnetic flux 磁通量 cí tōng liàng
    weber 韦伯 wéi bó
    coil 线圈 xiàn quān
    flux linkage 磁链 cí liàn
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    electromagnetic induction 电磁感应 diàn cí gǎn yìng
    Faraday's law 法拉第定律 fǎ lā dì dìng lǜ
    Lenz's law 楞次定律 léng cì dìng lǜ
    conservation of energy 能量守恒 néng liàng shǒu héng
    galvanometer 检流计 jiǎn liú jì
    eddy currents 涡流 wō liú
    Exercise sheet
    20.5

    Exam tips

    • Force on a current $F = BIL\sin\theta$; on a moving charge $F = BQv$; find the direction with Fleming's left-hand rule.
    • A charge moving perpendicular to $B$ moves in a circle ($BQv = mv^2/r$).
    • Electromagnetic induction: e.m.f. $=$ rate of change of flux linkage (Faraday); its direction opposes the change (Lenz's law).
  • 21 Alternating currents
    21.1

    Alternating current basics

    Syllabus
    1. understand and use the terms period, frequency and peak value as applied to an alternating current or voltage
    2. use equations of the form $x = x_0 \sin \omega t$ representing a sinusoidally alternating current or voltage
    3. recall and use the fact that the mean power in a resistive load is half the maximum power for a sinusoidal alternating current
    4. distinguish between root-mean-square (r.m.s.) and peak values and recall and use $I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = I_0 / \sqrt{2}$ and $V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = V_0 / \sqrt{2}$ for a sinusoidal alternating current

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    An electrical substation with transformers
    A substation's transformers step alternating voltage up or down.

    An alternating current 交流电 (a.c.) keeps reversing direction. Mains supply is sinusoidal a.c.: $I$ or $V$ follows a sine wave in time:

    $$I = I_{0} \sin (\omega t), \qquad V = V_{0} \sin (\omega t).$$

    (For a purely resistive load the voltage 电压 and current 电流 are in phase, which is the case in this syllabus.)

    Two current–time graphs: a steady horizontal line for direct current, and a sine wave of peak current I0 and period T for alternating current
    A steady direct current compared with a sinusoidal alternating current of peak $I_0$ and period $T$

    Key terms

    • period 周期 $T$ — the time for one full cycle. Unit: s.
    • frequency 频率 $f$ — cycles per second; $f = 1/T$. Mains is often $50\ \text{Hz}$ or $60\ \text{Hz}$.
    • angular frequency 角频率 $\omega = 2\pi f = 2\pi/T$.
    • peak value 峰值 $I_{0}$ or $V_{0}$ — the largest value in a cycle (also called the amplitude).
    • peak-to-peak value 峰峰值 $2 I_{0}$ — from $+I_{0}$ to $-I_{0}$. Useful when reading an oscilloscope.

    Reading a CRO trace

    Same as for any wave (Topic 7), using a cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器:

    • horizontal divisions × time-base 时基 → period $T$, so $f = 1/T$.
    • vertical divisions × $y$-gain → peak voltage $V_{0}$ (measure centre to peak, or peak-to-peak then halve).
    Explore

    Alternating current

    I = a sin(bt)

    AC is a sine wave — amplitude is the peak, b sets the frequency.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    alternating current 交流电 jiāo liú diàn
    voltage 电压 diàn yā
    current 电流 diàn liú
    period 周期 zhōu qī
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    angular frequency 角频率 jiǎo pín lǜ
    peak value 峰值 fēng zhí
    peak-to-peak value 峰峰值 fēng fēng zhí
    cathode-ray oscilloscope 示波器 shì bō qì
    time-base 时基 shí jī
    21.1

    Power delivered to a resistor

    For a resistive load $R$, the instant power 功率 is $P(t) = I(t)^{2} R$. With $I = I_{0}\sin(\omega t)$:

    The power in a resistor pulses; its average is half the peak power
    The power in a resistor pulses; its average is half the peak
    $$P(t) = I_{0}^{2} R \sin^{2}(\omega t).$$

    This is always positive, with peak $I_{0}^{2} R$ and minimum zero, oscillating at twice the frequency of $I$. The mean of $\sin^{2}(\omega t)$ over a cycle is $\tfrac{1}{2}$, so the average power is

    $$\langle P \rangle = \tfrac{1}{2} I_{0}^{2} R = \tfrac{1}{2} P_{\text{peak}}.$$

    Average a.c. power in a resistor is half the peak power.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    21.1

    Root-mean-square (r.m.s.) values

    The r.m.s. current $I_{\text{r.m.s.}}$ is the steady direct current that would give the same average power in the same resistance 电阻 $R$. From $\langle P \rangle = I_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2} R = \tfrac{1}{2} I_{0}^{2} R$:

    $$I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{I_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}, \qquad V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}.$$
    An a.c. sine voltage of peak V0, with a dashed horizontal line at V0 divided by root 2 marking the r.m.s. value — the steady d.c. level that gives the same average power
    The r.m.s. value is the steady d.c. level ($V_0/\sqrt{2}$) that delivers the same average power as the a.c.

    Worked example. An a.c. supply has a peak voltage of $12\ \text{V}$. Find its r.m.s. voltage.

    $$V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{2}} = \frac{12}{\sqrt{2}} \approx 8.5\ \text{V}.$$

    The $\sqrt{2}$ comes from the name root-mean-square 均方根: $I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \sqrt{\langle I^{2} \rangle}$ and $\langle \sin^{2}\rangle = \tfrac{1}{2}$. (Only the sinusoidal case is needed.)

    Why r.m.s. matters

    Quoted a.c. values are r.m.s. values. "$230\ \text{V}$ mains" means $V_{\text{r.m.s.}} = 230\ \text{V}$, with peak $V_{0} = 230\sqrt{2} \approx 325\ \text{V}$. Components must be rated for the peak, not the r.m.s. Average power then takes the d.c. form:

    $$\langle P \rangle = I_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2} R = V_{\text{r.m.s.}}^{2} / R = V_{\text{r.m.s.}} I_{\text{r.m.s.}}.$$

    Worked example. A heater of resistance $50\ \Omega$ is connected to the $230\ \text{V}$ r.m.s. mains. Find the r.m.s. current and the average power dissipated.

    $$I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = \frac{V_{\text{r.m.s.}}}{R} = \frac{230}{50} = 4.6\ \text{A}, \qquad \langle P \rangle = V_{\text{r.m.s.}} I_{\text{r.m.s.}} = 230 \times 4.6 \approx 1.1 \times 10^{3}\ \text{W}.$$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    resistance 电阻 diàn zǔ
    root-mean-square 均方根 jūn fāng gēn
    21.2

    Rectification

    Syllabus
    1. distinguish graphically between half-wave and full-wave rectification
    2. explain the use of a single diode for the half-wave rectification of an alternating current
    3. explain the use of four diodes (bridge rectifier) for the full-wave rectification of an alternating current
    4. analyse the effect of a single capacitor in smoothing, including the effect of the values of capacitance and the load resistance

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Waveforms on an oscilloscope screen
    An oscilloscope shows how a voltage varies with time.

    Rectification 整流 turns an alternating voltage into a one-direction (d.c.-like) voltage, using diodes 二极管 (which conduct in only one direction).

    Half-wave rectification

    A single diode in series with the load passes only the positive half of each cycle; in the negative half the diode is reverse-biased 反向偏置 and no current flows. This is half-wave rectification 半波整流.

    Output: positive half-waves with flat zero gaps. The mean output is $V_{0}/\pi \approx 0.32 V_{0}$. Drawback: half the input is wasted and the output is very uneven.

    Two voltage–time graphs: the input is a full sine wave; the output keeps only the positive half-cycles with flat gaps where the negative halves are blocked
    In half-wave rectification a single diode passes only the positive half-cycles

    Full-wave rectification (bridge rectifier)

    A bridge rectifier 桥式整流器 uses four diodes arranged so the current through the load always flows the same way, whichever a.c. terminal is positive — full-wave rectification 全波整流. On each half-cycle a different pair of diodes conducts, but the load always sees the same direction.

    Four diodes arranged in a diamond between the a.c. input terminals P and Q and the load R; diodes 1 and 2 conduct on one half-cycle, 3 and 4 on the other, so the d.c. output keeps the same polarity
    A four-diode bridge sends the load current the same way whichever a.c. terminal is positive

    Output: a continuous run of positive half-waves (no gaps), at twice the input frequency. The mean output is $2V_{0}/\pi \approx 0.64 V_{0}$ — double the half-wave value. It uses all the input and is smoother and easier to filter.

    Two voltage–time graphs: the input is a full sine wave; the output is a continuous run of positive humps with no gaps, at twice the input frequency
    In full-wave rectification every half-cycle is used, giving a continuous run of positive humps

    Drawing the diagrams

    • half-wave: a.c. source — single diode — load $R$, in series.
    • full-wave bridge: four diodes as the arms of a "diamond"; the a.c. input goes to one pair of opposite corners, the load $R$ across the other pair. The diode directions make the load terminals keep the same polarity for either input polarity.
    Explore

    Rectifier and smoothing route

    Watch alternating input become a smoother direct output.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    rectification 整流 zhěng liú
    diode 二极管 èr jí guǎn
    reverse-biased 反向偏置 fǎn xiàng piān zhì
    half-wave rectification 半波整流 bàn bō zhěng liú
    bridge rectifier 桥式整流器 qiáo shì zhěng liú qì
    full-wave rectification 全波整流 quán bō zhěng liú
    21.2

    Smoothing with a capacitor

    A rectifier's output is still bumpy. To smooth it, put a capacitor 电容器 $C$ in parallel with the load $R$.

    How it works

    • on the rising part of each pulse, the capacitor charges up to near the peak.
    • on the falling part (and any gap), the diodes are reverse-biased, so the capacitor discharges through the load, keeping current flowing. The voltage falls with time constant 时间常数 $RC$ (Topic 19).
    • at the next peak, the capacitor charges again, and the cycle repeats.

    The output now sits near the peak with small dips. The size of the dips is the ripple 纹波 (this whole step is called smoothing 平滑).

    A voltage–time graph showing the smoothed output (solid line) staying near the peaks with a small ripple, above the unsmoothed full-wave humps (dashed)
    A capacitor across the load smooths the rectified output, leaving only a small ripple

    What reduces the ripple

    • larger $C$ → more stored charge → smaller dip between peaks → smaller ripple.
    • larger $R$ → smaller load current → slower discharge → smaller ripple.
    • higher rectified frequency (full-wave is twice the input) → less time to discharge between peaks → smaller ripple.

    In short, a large $RC$ compared with the time between peaks gives a smoother output.

    Purpose in summary

    The smoothing capacitor reduces the ripple, giving a steadier d.c. voltage suitable for sensitive electronics.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    capacitor 电容器 diàn róng qì
    time constant 时间常数 shí jiān cháng shù
    ripple 纹波 wén bō
    smoothing 平滑 píng huá
    21.2

    Exam tips

    • $I_{rms} = I_0/\sqrt{2}$ for a sinusoidal current; use r.m.s. values for power ($P = I_{rms}^2 R$).
    • Mean power in a resistor $= \frac{1}{2}$ of the peak power.
    • Explain rectification (diode or bridge) and how a smoothing capacitor reduces the ripple.
  • 22 Quantum physics
    22.1

    Photons: the particle nature of light

    Syllabus
    1. understand that electromagnetic radiation has a particulate nature
    2. understand that a photon is a quantum of electromagnetic energy
    3. recall and use $E = hf$
    4. use the electronvolt (eV) as a unit of energy
    5. understand that a photon has momentum and that the momentum is given by $p = E/c$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Electromagnetic radiation behaves like particles as well as like a wave. The particles of EM radiation are photons 光子 — small packets ("quanta" 量子) of EM energy that travel at the speed of light.

    A photon is a packet of EM energy, with energy E = h f
    A photon is a packet of energy, E = hf

    Energy of a photon

    A photon of frequency 频率 $f$ has energy

    $$E = h f,$$

    where $h = 6.63 \times 10^{-34}\ \text{J s}$ is the Planck constant 普朗克常量. Using $c = f\lambda$:

    $$E = \frac{h c}{\lambda}.$$

    Worked example. Find the energy of a photon of green light of wavelength $500\ \text{nm}$. ($h = 6.63 \times 10^{-34}\ \text{J s}$, $c = 3.0 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.)

    $$E = \frac{hc}{\lambda} = \frac{(6.63 \times 10^{-34})(3.0 \times 10^{8})}{500 \times 10^{-9}} \approx 4.0 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}\ (\approx 2.5\ \text{eV}).$$

    Higher-frequency (shorter-wavelength 波长) photons carry more energy: one $\gamma$-ray photon carries far more than one radio photon.

    The electronvolt

    The electronvolt 电子伏特 (eV) is a handy energy unit on the atomic scale:

    $$1\ \text{eV} = 1.60 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}.$$

    It is the kinetic energy 动能 an electron 电子 gains moving through a potential difference 电势差 of 1 V. For example, a visible photon ($\lambda \approx 500\ \text{nm}$) has energy $\approx 2.5\ \text{eV}$. To go eV → J multiply by $1.60 \times 10^{-19}$; J → eV divide.

    Momentum of a photon

    A photon also carries momentum 动量:

    $$p = \frac{E}{c} = \frac{h}{\lambda}.$$

    It has zero rest mass but a non-zero momentum $E/c$. Radiation pressure (photons pushing on a surface) follows from this.

    Explore

    Energy of a photon

    E = h·f

    Photon energy is proportional to frequency — the gradient is Planck's constant h.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    photon 光子 guāng zi
    quanta 量子 liàng zǐ
    frequency 频率 pín lǜ
    Planck constant 普朗克常量 pǔ lǎng kè cháng liàng
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    electronvolt 电子伏特 diàn zi fú tè
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    potential difference 电势差 diàn shì chà
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    22.2

    Photoelectric effect

    Syllabus
    1. understand that photoelectrons may be emitted from a metal surface when it is illuminated by electromagnetic radiation
    2. understand and use the terms threshold frequency and threshold wavelength
    3. explain photoelectric emission in terms of photon energy and work function energy
    4. recall and use $hf = \Phi + \frac{1}{2}m{v_{\text{max}}}^2$
    5. explain why the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is independent of intensity, whereas the photoelectric current is proportional to intensity

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The photoelectric effect, photon by photon
    A field of solar panels
    Solar cells use the photoelectric effect to turn light into electricity.

    When EM radiation of high enough frequency hits a metal, electrons are emitted. These are photoelectrons 光电子, and the effect is the photoelectric effect 光电效应.

    A photon of energy hf hits a metal surface and ejects one electron; the photon's energy splits into the work function (to free the electron) plus the electron's maximum kinetic energy
    One photon gives its energy $hf$ to one electron: part frees it (the work function $\Phi$), the rest is the electron's KE
    Two gold-leaf electroscopes carrying a negatively charged zinc plate: in the first the gold leaf stays deflected; in the second, ultraviolet light shining on the plate makes the leaf fall as charge is lost
    A charged zinc plate loses its charge — the gold leaf falls — when ultraviolet light shines on it

    Threshold frequency and work function

    Each metal has a lowest photon frequency, the threshold frequency 极限频率 $f_{0}$, below which no electrons come out, however bright the light. The work function 逸出功 $\Phi$ is the least energy needed to free an electron from the surface:

    $$\Phi = h f_{0}.$$

    Different metals have different work functions (about $2$$5\ \text{eV}$).

    Einstein's photoelectric equation

    One photon gives all its energy to one electron. If the photon energy $hf$ is more than the work function, the electron escapes with kinetic energy up to a maximum:

    $$h f = \Phi + \tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{max}}^{2}, \qquad\text{so}\qquad \tfrac{1}{2} m v_{\text{max}}^{2} = h(f - f_{0}).$$

    Worked example. A metal has a work function of $2.0\ \text{eV}$. Light made of photons of energy $3.5\ \text{eV}$ shines on it. Find the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons.

    $$\tfrac{1}{2}mv_{\text{max}}^{2} = hf - \Phi = 3.5 - 2.0 = 1.5\ \text{eV}\ (= 2.4 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{J}).$$

    So the maximum KE of photoelectrons depends linearly on frequency, not on brightness.

    A graph of maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons against frequency of incident radiation: a straight line crossing the frequency axis at the threshold frequency f0 and rising for higher frequencies
    The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons rises linearly with frequency, reaching zero at the threshold frequency $f_0$

    Why the wave model fails

    A wave model predicts that brightness should set the electrons' kinetic energy, and that emission should happen at any frequency given enough time. But experiments show:

    • no emission below the threshold frequency, however bright.
    • immediate emission at or above the threshold, even when dim.
    • maximum KE depends on frequency, not brightness.
    • the number of photoelectrons (the current) depends on brightness.

    The photon model explains this: light arrives as photons each of energy $hf$. One photon–electron interaction either has enough energy to free the electron ($hf \geq \Phi$) or it does not.

    Why max KE is fixed but current grows with brightness

    A brighter beam of the same frequency has more photons per second, but each still carries $hf$. So the maximum KE of any electron is $hf - \Phi$ (set by $f$ only), while the rate of emission (the current) grows with the number of photons, i.e. with brightness. Doubling the brightness doubles the current but does not change the maximum KE.

    Explore

    The photoelectric effect

    KEmax = h·f − φ

    Max KE is a straight line in frequency, with intercept −φ (the work function).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    photoelectron 光电子 guāng diàn zi
    photoelectric effect 光电效应 guāng diàn xiào yìng
    threshold frequency 极限频率 jí xiàn pín lǜ
    work function 逸出功 yì chū gōng
    22.3

    Wave–particle duality

    Syllabus
    1. understand that the photoelectric effect provides evidence for a particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation while phenomena such as interference and diffraction provide evidence for a wave nature
    2. describe and interpret qualitatively the evidence provided by electron diffraction for the wave nature of particles
    3. understand the de Broglie wavelength as the wavelength associated with a moving particle
    4. recall and use $\lambda = h/p$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The photoelectric effect is strong evidence for the particle nature of light. But interference 干涉 (Young's double slit, the diffraction grating 衍射光栅) and diffraction 衍射 show its wave nature. So light has both wave and particle sides — this is wave–particle duality 波粒二象性.

    De Broglie hypothesis

    If a wave can act like particles, perhaps particles can act like waves. De Broglie proposed that any moving particle has a de Broglie wavelength 德布罗意波长:

    $$\lambda = \frac{h}{p},$$

    where $p = mv$. Example: an electron at $v = 4.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ has $p = 4.46 \times 10^{-23}\ \text{kg m s}^{-1}$, so $\lambda = 1.49 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{m} \approx 0.015\ \text{nm}$ — close to atomic spacings.

    Electron diffraction

    When electrons are fired at a crystal lattice 晶格 (e.g. thin graphite), they make a diffraction pattern of bright rings on a screen — exactly what waves of wavelength $\lambda = h/p$ would do. This is direct evidence for the wave nature of particles (electron diffraction 电子衍射): only waves diffract, yet electrons do.

    A faster electron has more momentum, so a shorter de Broglie wavelength, which diffracts less — the rings move closer together. Slowing the electrons spreads the rings apart. To calculate: $p = \sqrt{2 m E_{\text{K}}}$, and for an electron accelerated through p.d. $V$, $E_{\text{K}} = eV$, so $\lambda = h/\sqrt{2m_{e} e V}$.

    A beam of electrons from an electron gun passes through a thin graphite film and forms concentric bright rings, with a bright central spot, on a fluorescent screen
    Electrons fired at graphite form a ring diffraction pattern — only waves diffract, so electrons behave as waves

    Worked example. An electron is accelerated from rest through a p.d. of $2500\ \text{V}$. Find its de Broglie wavelength. ($m_{e} = 9.11 \times 10^{-31}\ \text{kg}$, $e = 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\ \text{C}$, $h = 6.63 \times 10^{-34}\ \text{J s}$.)

    Its kinetic energy is $E_{\text{K}} = eV$, so $\lambda = \dfrac{h}{\sqrt{2 m_{e} e V}}$:

    $$\lambda = \frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2(9.11 \times 10^{-31})(1.6 \times 10^{-19})(2500)}} \approx 2.5 \times 10^{-11}\ \text{m}.$$

    This is close to the spacing between atoms in a crystal, which is why the electrons diffract off the graphite.

    Explore

    The de Broglie wavelength

    λ = h/p

    A particle's wavelength is inversely proportional to its momentum — faster, heavier particles have shorter waves.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    interference 干涉 gān shè
    diffraction grating 衍射光栅 yǎn shè guāng shān
    diffraction 衍射 yǎn shè
    wave–particle duality 波粒二象性 bō lì èr xiàng xìng
    de Broglie wavelength 德布罗意波长 dé bù luó yì bō cháng
    crystal lattice 晶格 jīng gé
    electron diffraction 电子衍射 diàn zi yǎn shè
    22.4

    Energy levels in atoms

    Syllabus
    1. understand that there are discrete electron energy levels in isolated atoms (e.g. atomic hydrogen)
    2. understand the appearance and formation of emission and absorption line spectra
    3. recall and use $hf = E_1 - E_2$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    In an isolated atom, electrons can only sit at certain discrete 分立 energy levels 能级 — never in between. The lowest is the ground state 基态; the others are excited states 激发态.

    By convention, energies are written negative, with $E = 0$ for an electron just free of the atom. For hydrogen the ground state is $E_{1} = -13.6\ \text{eV}$; higher states approach zero.

    An energy-level diagram for hydrogen: horizontal lines at discrete negative energies from the ground state at −13.6 eV up to zero at n=infinity, with downward arrows showing emission transitions
    The electron energy levels of hydrogen are discrete and negative, with the ground state at $-13.6\ \text{eV}$

    Emission spectrum

    When an electron drops from a higher level $E_{2}$ to a lower level $E_{1}$, it emits one photon of energy

    $$h f = E_{2} - E_{1}.$$

    (Both energies are negative; their difference is positive.) Because the levels are discrete, only certain photon energies — and so certain wavelengths — come out. The emission spectrum 发射光谱 is a set of sharp bright lines on a dark background, one line per transition 跃迁. The pattern is a "fingerprint" of the element.

    The emission spectrum of hydrogen: a few sharp coloured lines (violet, blue, cyan, red) on a black background, plotted against wavelength
    The emission spectrum of hydrogen is a set of sharp bright lines on a dark background
    A periodic table where each element's box is replaced by a photograph of its real emission spectrum -- every one a different set of coloured bright lines on black
    Real emission spectra of the elements: each one is a unique set of bright lines -- a fingerprint of that element

    Absorption spectrum

    When white light passes through a cool gas, photons whose energy exactly matches an upward transition are absorbed. The light then shows dark lines on a bright background — the absorption spectrum 吸收光谱. The dark lines sit at the same wavelengths as the emission lines of the same gas.

    The spectrum of the Sun: a continuous rainbow band crossed by several dark vertical absorption lines, plotted against wavelength
    Dark absorption lines in the Sun's spectrum mark the wavelengths absorbed by cooler gas

    Calculations

    For a transition between two known levels:

    $$hf = E_{2} - E_{1}, \qquad \lambda = \frac{hc}{E_{2} - E_{1}}.$$

    Work in consistent units — convert eV to joules (× $1.60 \times 10^{-19}$) before finding $\lambda$ in metres, or use $hc \approx 1240\ \text{eV nm}$ for a quick estimate.

    Explore

    Make an element's spectral lines

    An electron dropping between fixed energy levels emits a photon of exactly the gap's energy — a fixed wavelength and colour. Each jump is one line of the element's barcode.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    discrete 分立 fēn lì
    energy level 能级 néng jí
    ground state 基态 jī tài
    excited state 激发态 jī fā tài
    emission spectrum 发射光谱 fā shè guāng pǔ
    transition 跃迁 yuè qiān
    absorption spectrum 吸收光谱 xī shōu guāng pǔ
    22.4

    Exam tips

    • Photon energy $E = hf = hc/\lambda$; the photoelectric equation is $hf = \Phi + \frac{1}{2}mv_{max}^2$.
    • The photoelectric effect shows light is quantised: below the threshold frequency, no electrons are emitted whatever the intensity.
    • de Broglie $\lambda = h/p$ gives particles a wavelength; electron diffraction is the evidence.
    • Energy levels are discrete; an emitted photon's energy equals the difference between two levels.
  • 23 Nuclear physics
    23.1

    Mass-energy equivalence

    Syllabus
    1. understand the equivalence between energy and mass as represented by $E = mc^2$ and recall and use this equation
    2. represent simple nuclear reactions by nuclear equations of the form $^{14}_{7}\text{N} + ^{4}_{2}\text{He} \rightarrow ^{17}_{8}\text{O} + ^{1}_{1}\text{H}$
    3. define and use the terms mass defect and binding energy
    4. sketch the variation of binding energy per nucleon with nucleon number
    5. explain what is meant by nuclear fusion and nuclear fission
    6. explain the relevance of binding energy per nucleon to nuclear reactions, including nuclear fusion and nuclear fission
    7. calculate the energy released in nuclear reactions using $E = c^2 \Delta m$

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Einstein's special relativity gives the famous link (mass-energy equivalence 质能等价):

    Mass and energy can change into each other, E = m c squared
    Mass and energy are equivalent and can change into each other
    $$E = m c^{2},$$

    where $c = 3.00 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. A mass $m$ matches an energy 能量 $E$ — the two can change into each other. For a mass change $\Delta m$:

    $$\Delta E = c^{2} \Delta m.$$

    In nuclear physics the masses are tiny but $c^{2}$ is huge, so a small mass change means a large energy. A mass change of $1\ \text{u}$ ($1.661 \times 10^{-27}\ \text{kg}$) matches $\Delta E \approx 1.49 \times 10^{-10}\ \text{J}$. This gives a conversion you will use again and again:

    $$1\ \text{u} \ \longleftrightarrow\ 931\ \text{MeV}.$$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    mass-energy equivalence 质能等价 zhì néng děng jià
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    23.1

    Nuclear reactions

    A nuclear reaction 核反应 is written like

    $$^{14}_{7}\text{N} + {}^{4}_{2}\text{He} \to {}^{17}_{8}\text{O} + {}^{1}_{1}\text{H},$$

    with nucleon number 核子数 conserved (top numbers: $14 + 4 = 17 + 1$) and charge conserved (bottom numbers: $7 + 2 = 8 + 1$) — this is conservation of charge 电荷守恒. Use these to fill in an unknown: identify the species, then balance the top and bottom numbers.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    nuclear reaction 核反应 hé fǎn yìng
    nucleon number 核子数 hé zǐ shù
    conservation of charge 电荷守恒 diàn hè shǒu héng
    23.1

    Mass defect and binding energy

    The mass of a nucleus 原子核 is less than the total mass of its separate protons 质子 and neutrons 中子. The difference is the mass defect 质量亏损 $\Delta m$:

    $$\Delta m = (Z m_{\text{p}} + N m_{\text{n}}) - m_{\text{nucleus}}.$$

    By $E = mc^{2}$, this "missing" mass was released as energy when the nucleus formed. To pull the nucleus fully apart you must put that energy back — the binding energy 结合能 $B$:

    $$B = \Delta m \cdot c^{2}.$$
    Separate protons and neutrons have total mass Z m_p + N m_n; when they assemble into a nucleus the nucleus has less mass (the mass defect), and that missing mass is released as the binding energy B
    The assembled nucleus has less mass than its separate nucleons; the missing mass is released as binding energy

    Worked example. A helium-4 nucleus has a mass defect of $\Delta m = 0.0304\ \text{u}$. Find its binding energy. ($1\ \text{u}$ corresponds to $931\ \text{MeV}$.)

    $$B = \Delta m \cdot c^{2} = 0.0304 \times 931 \approx 28\ \text{MeV}.$$

    A more tightly bound nucleus has a larger mass defect and larger binding energy. The binding energy per nucleon 比结合能 is $B/A$ (usually in MeV per nucleon) — a measure of how tightly each nucleon is held, useful for comparing nuclides.

    Binding energy per nucleon vs nucleon number

    A graph of $B/A$ against $A$ has a typical shape:

    • for light nuclei ($A < 20$), $B/A$ rises quickly (with a spike at the very stable $^{4}_{2}\text{He}$).
    • around $A \sim 56$ (iron), $B/A$ reaches its maximum of about $8.8\ \text{MeV}$. Iron-56 is the most stable nucleus.
    • for heavy nuclei ($A > 100$), $B/A$ falls slowly, to about $7.5\ \text{MeV}$ for uranium.

    So the curve is dome-shaped, rising to iron then falling.

    A graph of binding energy per nucleon in MeV against nucleon number: rising steeply for light nuclei to a peak of about 8.8 MeV near A = 56, then falling slowly for heavy nuclei, with arrows showing that fusion of light nuclei and fission of heavy nuclei both move towards the peak
    Binding energy per nucleon peaks near iron ($A \approx 56$); lighter and heavier nuclei are less tightly bound
    Explore

    Mass defect energy lab

    E = delta m c^2

    Change mass defect and see binding energy rise with E = mc^2.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    nucleus 原子核 yuán zǐ hé
    proton 质子 zhì zi
    neutron 中子 zhōng zi
    mass defect 质量亏损 zhì liàng kuī sǔn
    binding energy 结合能 jié hé néng
    binding energy per nucleon 比结合能 bǐ jié hé néng
    23.1

    Nuclear fusion and fission

    A nuclear power station cooling tower
    A nuclear power station releases energy by nuclear fission.

    Energy is released when nuclei move towards the iron peak — by joining light nuclei or splitting heavy ones.

    Two ways to release nuclear energy: fusion joins two light nuclei into one heavier nucleus; fission splits one heavy nucleus into two lighter ones
    Fusion joins light nuclei; fission splits a heavy nucleus — both release energy by moving towards the iron peak

    Nuclear fusion

    Nuclear fusion 核聚变 joins two light nuclei into one heavier nucleus:

    $$^{2}_{1}\text{H} + {}^{3}_{1}\text{H} \to {}^{4}_{2}\text{He} + {}^{1}_{0}\text{n} + \text{energy}.$$

    The product has greater binding energy per nucleon than the reactants, so energy is released. Fusion powers stars. It needs very high temperatures (millions of kelvin) so the nuclei have enough kinetic energy 动能 to beat their electrostatic 静电 repulsion and get close enough for the strong nuclear force 强核力 to take over.

    Nuclear fission

    Nuclear fission 核裂变 splits a heavy nucleus into two lighter ones:

    $$^{235}_{92}\text{U} + {}^{1}_{0}\text{n} \to {}^{141}_{56}\text{Ba} + {}^{92}_{36}\text{Kr} + 3\, {}^{1}_{0}\text{n} + \text{energy}.$$

    The products have higher binding energy per nucleon than $^{235}$U, so energy is released. The extra neutrons can cause more fissions — a chain reaction 链式反应 in a large enough mass of fuel (the critical mass 临界质量). This is the basis of nuclear power and weapons.

    A branching tree in which one uranium-235 nucleus is split by a neutron into fission fragments plus neutrons, each of which splits a further uranium-235 nucleus, so the number of fissions multiplies generation by generation
    In an uncontrolled chain reaction each fission of uranium-235 releases neutrons that cause more fissions

    Calculating the energy released

    1. find the total mass of the reactants.
    2. find the total mass of the products.
    3. mass change $\Delta m = m_{\text{reactants}} - m_{\text{products}}$ (positive when energy is released).
    4. energy released $\Delta E = c^{2} \Delta m$.

    In kg this gives joules; in atomic mass units use $\Delta E\ (\text{MeV}) = \Delta m\ (\text{u}) \times 931$.

    Worked example. In a nuclear reaction the total mass decreases by $0.020\ \text{u}$. Find the energy released.

    $$\Delta E = \Delta m\ (\text{u}) \times 931 = 0.020 \times 931 \approx 19\ \text{MeV}.$$
    Explore

    Nuclear fission chain reaction

    A neutron splits a heavy nucleus, releasing energy and more neutrons — which split more nuclei.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    nuclear fusion 核聚变 hé jù biàn
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    electrostatic 静电 jìng diàn
    strong nuclear force 强核力 qiáng hé lì
    nuclear fission 核裂变 hé liè biàn
    chain reaction 链式反应 liàn shì fǎn yìng
    critical mass 临界质量 lín jiè zhì liàng
    23.2

    Radioactive decay

    Syllabus
    1. understand that fluctuations in count rate provide evidence for the random nature of radioactive decay
    2. understand that radioactive decay is both spontaneous and random
    3. define activity and decay constant, and recall and use $A = \lambda N$
    4. define half-life
    5. use $\lambda = 0.693 / t_{\frac{1}{2}}$
    6. understand the exponential nature of radioactive decay, and sketch and use the relationship $x = x_0 e^{-\lambda t}$, where $x$ could represent activity, number of undecayed nuclei or received count rate

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Radioactive decay & half-life

    Random and spontaneous

    Radioactive decay is:

    • spontaneous 自发 — it happens with no outside trigger, and the rate is not changed by temperature, pressure or chemical state; and
    • random 随机 — you cannot predict when a given nucleus will decay, only the probability that it decays in a time.

    Evidence for randomness: the count rate fluctuates. A Geiger counter 盖革计数器 next to a source clicks at uneven intervals — never a steady stream — although the long-run mean rate is well-defined.

    A radioactive source inside a cloud chamber, with many thin wispy white beta-particle tracks fanning out from it across the dark vapour
    Each beta particle from the source leaves a thin track in a cloud chamber -- direct evidence of separate, random decays

    Activity and decay constant

    For $N$ undecayed nuclei of a radionuclide 放射性核素, the rate of decay is

    $$A = \lambda N.$$
    • $A$ is the activity 活度 — decays per unit time. Unit: becquerel 贝克勒尔 (Bq) $= \text{s}^{-1}$.
    • $\lambda$ is the decay constant 衰变常数 — the probability per unit time that a nucleus decays. Unit: $\text{s}^{-1}$.

    $\lambda$ is fixed for a nuclide; a larger sample (larger $N$) has proportionally larger activity.

    Exponential decay

    Since $\lambda$ is the fractional decay rate, $\dfrac{dN}{dt} = -\lambda N$, whose solution is an exponential decay 指数衰减:

    $$N = N_{0} e^{-\lambda t}.$$

    Because $A = \lambda N$, the activity (and any count rate 计数率 proportional to it) decays the same way:

    $$A = A_{0} e^{-\lambda t}.$$

    Why exponential? For each nucleus, $\lambda$ is a fixed probability per unit time, independent of the others and of the nucleus's age. So the same fraction decays in each time interval, which gives exponential decay.

    Half-life

    The half-life 半衰期 $t_{1/2}$ is the time for the number of undecayed nuclei (or the activity, or the count rate) to fall to half. From $N = N_{0} e^{-\lambda t}$ with $N = N_{0}/2$:

    $$\ln 2 = \lambda t_{1/2}, \qquad \lambda = \frac{\ln 2}{t_{1/2}} \approx \frac{0.693}{t_{1/2}}.$$

    Worked example. A radioactive isotope has a half-life of $6.0$ hours. Find its decay constant.

    Convert the half-life to seconds: $6.0\ \text{h} = 21\,600\ \text{s}$. Then

    $$\lambda = \frac{\ln 2}{t_{1/2}} = \frac{0.693}{21\,600} \approx 3.2 \times 10^{-5}\ \text{s}^{-1}.$$

    A larger decay constant means a shorter half-life. After $n$ half-lives the surviving fraction is $(1/2)^{n}$; after 5 half-lives only about 3% remains.

    A radioactive decay curve: the number of undecayed nuclei against time, an exponential fall in which the number halves over each successive half-life, from  to  to  to
    The number of undecayed nuclei falls by half in each half-life

    Finding $\lambda$ from data

    Given $A_{0}$ and $A$ at time $t$:

    $$\lambda = \frac{1}{t} \ln\frac{A_{0}}{A}, \qquad t_{1/2} = \frac{\ln 2}{\lambda}.$$

    Taking logs of $A = A_{0} e^{-\lambda t}$ gives $\ln A = \ln A_{0} - \lambda t$, so a plot of $\ln A$ against $t$ is a straight line with gradient $-\lambda$. Use this with several data points.

    A graph of natural-log of activity against time: the data lie on a straight line falling with gradient minus lambda, confirming exponential decay and giving the decay constant
    A graph of $\ln A$ against time is a straight line of gradient $-\lambda$
    Explore

    Decay equations (α, β, γ)

    Choose a decay type; the daughter nuclide is fixed so the nucleon number A and the proton number Z both balance.

    Explore

    Half-life — watch the nuclei decay

    Each nucleus has a fixed chance of decaying, at random. Move time forward: about half the remaining nuclei decay every half-life — so the count halves, then halves again.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    spontaneous 自发 zì fā
    random 随机 suí jī
    Geiger counter 盖革计数器 gài gé jì shù qì
    radionuclide 放射性核素 fàng shè xìng hé sù
    activity 活度 huó dù
    becquerel 贝克勒尔 bèi kè lēi ěr
    decay constant 衰变常数 shuāi biàn cháng shù
    exponential decay 指数衰减 zhǐ shù shuāi jiǎn
    count rate 计数率 jì shù lǜ
    half-life 半衰期 bàn shuāi qī
    23.2

    Exam tips

    • $E = mc^2$; the mass defect is the mass lost when nucleons bind, released as binding energy.
    • Binding energy per nucleon peaks near iron — both fusion (light nuclei) and fission (heavy nuclei) move towards it and release energy.
    • Activity $A = \lambda N$; decay is exponential $N = N_0 e^{-\lambda t}$; half-life $t_{1/2} = \ln 2 / \lambda$.
    • Balance nuclear equations by conserving nucleon number and proton number.
  • 24 Medical physics
    24.1

    Ultrasound

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a piezo-electric crystal changes shape when a p.d. is applied across it and that the crystal generates an e.m.f. when its shape changes
    2. understand how ultrasound waves are generated and detected by a piezoelectric transducer
    3. understand how the reflection of pulses of ultrasound at boundaries between tissues can be used to obtain diagnostic information about internal structures
    4. define the specific acoustic impedance of a medium as $Z = \rho c$, where $c$ is the speed of sound in the medium
    5. use $I_{\text{R}} / I_0 = (Z_1 - Z_2)^2 / (Z_1 + Z_2)^2$ for the intensity reflection coefficient of a boundary between two media
    6. recall and use $I = I_0 e^{-\mu x}$ for the attenuation of ultrasound in matter

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Piezo-electric effect

    A piezo-electric 压电 crystal changes shape a little when a p.d. is put across it, and the reverse: it makes an electromotive force 电动势 (e.m.f.) across itself when its shape is changed. Quartz and PZT are common examples. Two linked effects:

    Applying a p.d. changes the crystal's shape; squeezing the crystal makes an e.m.f.
    Applying a p.d. deforms the crystal; squeezing it makes a p.d.
    • apply a p.d. → the crystal changes shape (used to make vibrations).
    • change the shape (a wave squeezes it) → an e.m.f. appears (used to detect vibrations).

    Piezo-electric transducer

    A transducer 换能器 uses this effect to both make and detect ultrasound 超声波.

    • an alternating p.d. (a few MHz) makes the crystal vibrate at the same frequency, sending out longitudinal 纵波 waves above $20\ \text{kHz}$ ($1$$10\ \text{MHz}$ for medical imaging).
    • the same crystal then detects: returning ultrasound makes it vibrate and produce an e.m.f.

    So one transducer is both emitter and detector, switching between sending and listening.

    A cut-away of an ultrasound transducer: a coaxial cable feeding a piezo-electric crystal with electrodes, backing material behind it, a plastic cover and lens in front, all inside an earthed metal case
    A piezo-electric transducer both sends and detects ultrasound using a vibrating crystal

    Pulse-echo imaging

    To see inside the body (pulse-echo 脉冲回波 imaging):

    1. the transducer sends a short pulse into the body.
    2. at each tissue boundary, part of the pulse is reflected and part goes on.
    3. the transducer detects each reflected pulse.
    4. the time delay gives the depth: $d = c t / 2$ (there and back). The echo's amplitude gives the strength of the reflection.

    Worked example. An ultrasound pulse returns to the transducer $60\ \mu\text{s}$ after it was sent. The speed of sound in the tissue is $1500\ \text{m s}^{-1}$. Find the depth of the reflecting boundary.

    The pulse travels there and back, so $d = \dfrac{ct}{2}$:

    $$d = \frac{1500 \times 60 \times 10^{-6}}{2} = 0.045\ \text{m}\ (= 4.5\ \text{cm}).$$
    1. sweeping across the body builds a 2-D image.
    An ultrasound machine screen showing a fan-shaped grey scan of a 20-week fetus in profile
    A real ultrasound image — the fan shape comes from the transducer sweeping across the body. Every bright speck is an echo from a boundary between tissues, and its depth was worked out from the echo's time delay, exactly as in the worked example above

    A coupling gel 耦合剂 is put between the transducer and the skin to push out the air; without it almost all the ultrasound would reflect at the skin–air boundary and never enter the body.

    An A-scan trace on an oscilloscope: a large transmitted pulse, then smaller echo pulses from the fat–muscle boundary and the muscle–bone boundary at later times
    An A-scan shows the transmitted pulse and the echoes from each tissue boundary

    Specific acoustic impedance

    The specific acoustic impedance 声阻抗 of a medium is

    $$Z = \rho c,$$

    where $\rho$ is the density 密度 and $c$ the speed of sound. Unit: $\text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}$. Bone has large $Z$; air has small $Z$; soft tissue is in between.

    Worked example. Find the specific acoustic impedance of soft tissue. (Density $1060\ \text{kg m}^{-3}$, speed of sound $1540\ \text{m s}^{-1}$.)

    $$Z = \rho c = 1060 \times 1540 \approx 1.6 \times 10^{6}\ \text{kg m}^{-2}\ \text{s}^{-1}.$$

    Reflection at a boundary

    At a boundary between media of impedance $Z_{1}$ and $Z_{2}$, the intensity reflection coefficient 强度反射系数 (fraction reflected) is

    $$\frac{I_{\text{R}}}{I_{0}} = \left(\frac{Z_{1} - Z_{2}}{Z_{1} + Z_{2}}\right)^{2}.$$
    • very different impedances: almost all is reflected (skin/air — hence the gel).
    • very similar impedances: almost nothing is reflected, so the boundary cannot be seen.
    • best for imaging: different enough to give an echo, but not so different that nothing passes on.
    At a boundary between media of acoustic impedance Z1 and Z2, the incident pulse splits into a reflected part and a transmitted part; the bigger the impedance difference, the bigger the reflected echo
    At a boundary, part of the pulse reflects and part transmits — a bigger impedance difference gives a bigger echo

    Attenuation

    As ultrasound goes through tissue, its intensity falls with distance:

    $$I = I_{0} e^{-\mu x},$$

    where $\mu$ is the attenuation coefficient 衰减系数 (unit $\text{m}^{-1}$). The same form applies to X-rays.

    A graph of intensity against thickness: both curves fall exponentially, but soft tissue with a small attenuation coefficient falls slowly while bone with a large coefficient falls off fast
    Intensity falls exponentially with thickness; a larger attenuation coefficient (bone) falls off faster
    Explore

    Ultrasound scan route

    Follow a pulse from transducer to echo image.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    piezo-electric 压电 yā diàn
    electromotive force 电动势 diàn dòng shì
    transducer 换能器 huàn néng qì
    ultrasound 超声波 chāo shēng bō
    longitudinal 纵波 zòng bō
    pulse-echo 脉冲回波 mài chōng huí bō
    coupling gel 耦合剂 ǒu hé jì
    specific acoustic impedance 声阻抗 shēng zǔ kàng
    density 密度 mì dù
    intensity reflection coefficient 强度反射系数 qiáng dù fǎn shè xì shù
    attenuation coefficient 衰减系数 shuāi jiǎn xì shù
    24.2

    X-rays

    Syllabus
    1. explain that X-rays are produced by electron bombardment of a metal target and calculate the minimum wavelength of X-rays produced from the accelerating p.d.
    2. understand the use of X-rays in imaging internal body structures, including an understanding of the term contrast in X-ray imaging
    3. recall and use $I = I_0 e^{-\mu x}$ for the attenuation of X-rays in matter
    4. understand that computed tomography (CT) scanning produces a 3D image of an internal structure by first combining multiple X-ray images taken in the same section from different angles to obtain a 2D image of the section, then repeating this process along an axis and combining 2D images of multiple sections

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Production

    X-rays come from an X-ray tube X射线管:

    1. a heated cathode 阴极 emits electrons by thermionic emission 热电子发射.
    2. a high p.d. (tens to hundreds of kV) accelerates the electrons across a vacuum 真空 to a metal target (the anode 阳极, often tungsten).
    3. the electrons hit the target and slow sharply. Most of their kinetic energy 动能 becomes heat; a small part is emitted as X-ray photons 光子 (Bremsstrahlung 轫致辐射, "braking radiation"). Some electrons knock out inner electrons of the metal atoms, and the refilling emits characteristic 特征 X-ray lines.
    A diagram of an X-ray tube: a heated metal filament (cathode) driven by a low voltage, a high voltage accelerating electrons across an evacuated tube to a metal anode with an angled tungsten target, and X-rays leaving the target
    In an X-ray tube electrons from the heated cathode are accelerated onto a metal target anode

    Minimum wavelength

    The most energy one X-ray photon can have is the full kinetic energy of one accelerated electron, lost in a single event. For accelerating p.d. $V$, the KE is $eV$, so

    $$h f_{\text{max}} = e V, \qquad \lambda_{\text{min}} = \frac{h c}{e V}.$$

    This is the short-wavelength cut-off. The continuous Bremsstrahlung spectrum tails off above $\lambda_{\text{min}}$, with sharp characteristic peaks set by the target metal.

    A graph of X-ray intensity against wavelength: a continuous curve starting abruptly at a minimum wavelength , rising to a broad maximum and tailing off, with a few sharp characteristic peaks superimposed
    A typical X-ray spectrum — a continuous Bremsstrahlung curve cut off at $\lambda_0$, with sharp characteristic peaks

    Imaging with X-rays

    X-rays pass through the patient onto a detector. Tissues that attenuate 衰减 more (bone, high $Z$) cast a stronger shadow and look lighter; tissues that attenuate less (soft tissue, lung) look darker.

    The contrast 对比度 is the difference in attenuation between tissues. A contrast medium 造影剂 (e.g. a barium meal) can be given to make soft tissues stand out.

    A front-view chest X-ray showing white ribs, spine and the heart shadow against the dark grey of the air-filled lungs
    A real chest X-ray: dense bone absorbs more X-rays and looks white; the air-filled lungs let X-rays through and look dark

    Attenuation law

    $$I = I_{0} e^{-\mu x}.$$

    Higher-energy X-rays penetrate further (smaller $\mu$); bone has a much larger $\mu$ than soft tissue. To find the thickness for a given fraction, take logs: $x = \dfrac{1}{\mu} \ln\dfrac{I_{0}}{I}$. The half-value thickness 半值厚度 $x_{1/2} = \ln 2 / \mu$ halves the intensity (like half-life in decay).

    Worked example. X-rays pass through $3.0\ \text{cm}$ of tissue with attenuation coefficient $\mu = 40\ \text{m}^{-1}$. Find the fraction of the intensity that gets through.

    $$\frac{I}{I_{0}} = e^{-\mu x} = e^{-40 \times 0.030} = e^{-1.2} \approx 0.30.$$

    Computed tomography (CT)

    A computed tomography 计算机断层扫描 (CT) scan builds a 3-D image:

    1. the tube and detectors rotate around the patient, taking many images of one thin slice from different angles.
    2. a computer combines these into a 2-D cross-section of the slice.
    3. the patient is moved along, and the next slice is imaged.
    4. the slices are stacked into a 3-D image.

    CT shows far more than a single X-ray, because overlapping soft tissues are separated by the many-angle reconstruction.

    A CT-scan arrangement: a fan of X-ray beams passes through the patient's body to a curved array of X-ray detectors on the far side, and the tube and detectors rotate around the patient
    In a CT scan the X-ray tube and detectors rotate around the patient to image a slice from many angles
    Explore

    X-ray production route

    Follow electrons from cathode to X-ray photons.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    X-ray tube X射线管 X shè xiàn guǎn
    cathode 阴极 yīn jí
    thermionic emission 热电子发射 rè diàn zi fā shè
    vacuum 真空 zhēn kōng
    target
    anode 阳极 yáng jí
    tungsten
    kinetic energy 动能 dòng néng
    photon 光子 guāng zi
    Bremsstrahlung 轫致辐射 rèn zhì fú shè
    characteristic 特征 tè zhēng
    attenuate 衰减 shuāi jiǎn
    contrast 对比度 duì bǐ dù
    contrast medium 造影剂 zào yǐng jì
    half-value thickness 半值厚度 bàn zhí hòu dù
    computed tomography 计算机断层扫描 jì suàn jī duàn céng sǎo miáo
    24.3

    PET scanning

    Syllabus
    1. understand that a tracer is a substance containing radioactive nuclei that can be introduced into the body and is then absorbed by the tissue being studied
    2. recall that a tracer that decays by $\beta^+$ decay is used in positron emission tomography (PET scanning)
    3. understand that annihilation occurs when a particle interacts with its antiparticle and that mass–energy and momentum are conserved in the process
    4. explain that, in PET scanning, positrons emitted by the decay of the tracer annihilate when they interact with electrons in the tissue, producing a pair of gamma-ray photons travelling in opposite directions
    5. calculate the energy of the gamma-ray photons emitted during the annihilation of an electron-positron pair
    6. understand that the gamma-ray photons from an annihilation event travel outside the body and can be detected, and an image of the tracer concentration in the tissue can be created by processing the arrival times of the gamma-ray photons

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Tracer

    A tracer 示踪剂 is a substance with radioactive nuclei put into the body. It is taken up more by the tissue being studied (e.g. a tumour takes up more glucose-tagged tracer due to its high metabolism 代谢). Its decay is detected from outside.

    In positron emission tomography 正电子发射断层扫描 (PET), the tracer is a $\beta^{+}$ emitter — it gives out a positron 正电子. A common one is fluorine-18 on a glucose analogue (FDG).

    Annihilation

    When a particle meets its antiparticle 反粒子 they annihilate 湮灭: their mass turns into electromagnetic energy. In PET:

    • a positron travels a few mm before meeting an electron 电子.
    • they annihilate. Energy and momentum 动量 are conserved.
    • since the total momentum is about zero, two photons are produced going in opposite directions, each $511\ \text{keV}$ ($= m_{e} c^{2}$).
    In PET a positron and electron annihilate inside a detector ring, producing two 511 keV photons that fly off in opposite directions; the two simultaneous arrivals (a coincidence) fix the line the annihilation lay on
    PET: annihilation gives two 511 keV photons in opposite directions; a coincidence fixes the line

    Energy of the annihilation photons

    By energy conservation, the total photon energy equals the pair's rest energy 能量:

    $$2 h f = 2 m_{e} c^{2}, \qquad h f = m_{e} c^{2}.$$

    Each photon has $h f = m_{e} c^{2} \approx 8.2 \times 10^{-14}\ \text{J} \approx 0.51\ \text{MeV}$, with $\lambda \approx 2.4 \times 10^{-12}\ \text{m}$.

    Reconstructing the image

    The two photons leave the body in opposite directions and hit detector rings around the patient. Recording the two simultaneous arrivals (a "coincidence") fixes the line the annihilation happened on. Many coincidences from many angles let the computer build a 3-D map of the tracer — showing tissues with high metabolic activity. Comparing the two arrival times can refine the position along that line (time-of-flight PET).

    A coloured PET slice of the brain: a blue background with a ring of yellow and red marking where the glucose tracer collected most
    A finished PET image of the brain: warm colours (red, yellow) mark where the tracer collected -- the most active tissue
    Explore

    PET scan route

    Follow positron emission to a ring of detected photons.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    tracer 示踪剂 shì zōng jì
    metabolism 代谢 dài xiè
    positron emission tomography 正电子发射断层扫描 zhèng diàn zi fā shè duàn céng sǎo miáo
    positron 正电子 zhèng diàn zi
    antiparticle 反粒子 fǎn lì zi
    annihilate 湮灭 yān miè
    electron 电子 diàn zi
    momentum 动量 dòng liàng
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    24.3

    Exam tips

    • Ultrasound reflects at boundaries (acoustic impedance); a coupling gel reduces reflection at the skin.
    • X-rays are attenuated as $I = I_0 e^{-\mu x}$; contrast media (barium, iodine) absorb strongly.
    • PET uses a positron emitter; annihilation gives two $\gamma$-rays in opposite directions, located by the detector ring.
  • 25 Astronomy and cosmology
    25.1

    Luminosity and radiant flux intensity

    Syllabus
    1. understand the term luminosity as the total power of radiation emitted by a star
    2. recall and use the inverse square law for radiant flux intensity $F$ in terms of the luminosity $L$ of the source $F = L / (4\pi d^2)$
    3. understand that an object of known luminosity is called a standard candle
    4. understand the use of standard candles to determine distances to galaxies

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    The luminosity 光度 $L$ of a star is the total power 功率 of radiation it gives out — the energy 能量 radiated per second in all directions. Unit: watt (W).

    At distance $d$, this power has spread over a sphere of area $4\pi d^{2}$. The radiant flux intensity 辐射通量密度 $F$ (power per unit area) at distance $d$ is

    $$F = \frac{L}{4\pi d^{2}}.$$

    Worked example. The Sun's luminosity is $L = 3.8 \times 10^{26}\ \text{W}$. Find the radiant flux intensity at the Earth, a distance $d = 1.5 \times 10^{11}\ \text{m}$ away.

    $$F = \frac{L}{4\pi d^{2}} = \frac{3.8 \times 10^{26}}{4\pi (1.5 \times 10^{11})^{2}} \approx 1.4 \times 10^{3}\ \text{W m}^{-2}.$$

    Unit: $\text{W m}^{-2}$. This is the inverse-square law 平方反比定律 for flux: doubling the distance cuts the flux to a quarter. A telescope measures $F$; if $L$ is known, the distance follows:

    $$d = \sqrt{\frac{L}{4\pi F}}.$$
    Three large telescope domes silhouetted on a mountain ridge at dusk against a pink sky, with a huge orange full Moon rising directly behind them
    The four units of ESO's Very Large Telescope in Chile, used to measure the flux from distant stars
    A point source of power L emits light through square patches at distances d, 2d and 3d; the patch area grows as the square of the distance (A, 4A, 9A), so the flux per unit area falls as the square of the distance (F, F/4, F/9)
    The same power spreads over a larger area as distance grows, so flux falls as $1/d^{2}$
    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    luminosity 光度 guāng dù
    power 功率 gōng lǜ
    energy 能量 néng liàng
    radiant flux intensity 辐射通量密度 fú shè tōng liàng mì dù
    inverse-square law 平方反比定律 píng fāng fǎn bǐ dìng lǜ
    25.1

    Standard candles

    A standard candle 标准烛光 is an object whose luminosity is known from its type. Once you find one in a distant galaxy and measure the flux $F$ from it, you get its distance from $d = \sqrt{L/(4\pi F)}$.

    Examples:

    • Cepheid variables 造父变星 (pulsating stars) — the pulsation period is tightly linked to the luminosity, so the period gives $L$.
    • Type Ia supernovae 超新星 — a white dwarf reaching a critical mass and exploding always has about the same peak luminosity.

    A standard candle gives $L$ without first knowing the distance, so it reaches galaxies far beyond parallax 视差.

    A spiral galaxy seen at an angle, with a bright glowing core, dust lanes winding through its disc, and two small companion galaxies nearby, set against a star field
    The Andromeda Galaxy, our nearest large galaxy, about 2.5 million light-years away — Cepheids in it are standard candles
    A log-log graph of luminosity (in units of the Sun's luminosity) against pulsation period in days for Type I Cepheid variables: the points scatter about a clear rising straight line, so a longer period means a more luminous star
    For Cepheid variables the pulsation period sets the luminosity, making them standard candles
    Explore

    Standard candle distance lab

    brightness proportional to 1 / distance^2

    Move distance and see why brightness falls quickly.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    standard candle 标准烛光 biāo zhǔn zhú guāng
    Cepheid variables 造父变星 zào fù biàn xīng
    supernovae 超新星 chāo xīn xīng
    parallax 视差 shì chà
    25.2

    Stellar surface temperature

    Syllabus
    1. recall and use Wien’s displacement law $\lambda_{\text{max}} \propto 1/T$ to estimate the peak surface temperature of a star
    2. use the Stefan–Boltzmann law $L = 4\pi\sigma r^2 T^4$
    3. use Wien’s displacement law and the Stefan–Boltzmann law to estimate the radius of a star

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Wien's displacement law

    A hot body gives out a continuous (blackbody 黑体) spectrum with a peak at a wavelength 波长 $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ set by its temperature 温度. Wien's displacement law 维恩位移定律:

    $$\lambda_{\text{max}} T = \text{constant}, \qquad b \approx 2.90 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m K}.$$

    Worked example. A star's blackbody spectrum peaks at $\lambda_{\text{max}} = 500\ \text{nm}$. Find its surface temperature. ($b = 2.90 \times 10^{-3}\ \text{m K}$.)

    $$T = \frac{b}{\lambda_{\text{max}}} = \frac{2.90 \times 10^{-3}}{500 \times 10^{-9}} \approx 5800\ \text{K}.$$

    Hotter stars peak at shorter wavelengths: a cool red star ($\sim 3000\ \text{K}$) peaks in the infrared; the Sun ($\sim 5800\ \text{K}$) peaks near $500\ \text{nm}$; a hot blue-white star ($\sim 20{,}000\ \text{K}$) peaks in the ultraviolet. Measuring $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ gives the surface temperature.

    Three towering columns of brown and gold gas and dust rising against a blue-green nebula, tipped with bright young stars and scattered points of light
    The Pillars of Creation in the Eagle Nebula — clouds of gas and dust lit by hot, newly formed stars
    Black-body intensity-against-wavelength curves at 3000 K, 6000 K and 12000 K: a hotter body has a taller curve at every wavelength and its peak lies at a shorter wavelength, with the visible range shaded
    A hotter black body radiates more, and its peak wavelength shifts towards the blue (Wien's law)

    Stefan–Boltzmann law

    A star, treated as a blackbody sphere of radius $r$ and surface temperature $T$, has luminosity

    $$L = 4\pi \sigma r^{2} T^{4},$$

    where $\sigma = 5.67 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{W m}^{-2}\ \text{K}^{-4}$ is the Stefan–Boltzmann constant 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼常量 (the Stefan–Boltzmann law 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼定律). Two strong dependences:

    • $L \propto r^{2}$ — twice the radius, four times the luminosity (same $T$).
    • $L \propto T^{4}$ — twice the temperature, sixteen times the luminosity (same $r$).

    Worked example. A star has radius $r = 7.0 \times 10^{8}\ \text{m}$ and surface temperature $T = 5800\ \text{K}$. Find its luminosity. ($\sigma = 5.67 \times 10^{-8}\ \text{W m}^{-2}\ \text{K}^{-4}$.)

    $$L = 4\pi\sigma r^{2} T^{4} = 4\pi (5.67 \times 10^{-8})(7.0 \times 10^{8})^{2}(5800)^{4} \approx 3.9 \times 10^{26}\ \text{W}.$$

    Estimating a star's radius

    Combine the two laws:

    1. measure $\lambda_{\text{max}}$ → get $T$ from Wien's law.
    2. find $L$ (e.g. from flux $F$ and distance $d$: $L = 4\pi d^{2} F$).
    3. solve the Stefan–Boltzmann law for $r$: $r = \sqrt{L/(4\pi \sigma T^{4})}$.

    This is how astronomers estimate radii of stars they cannot see as a disc.

    Explore

    A star's luminosity and radius

    L ∝ r²

    For a given surface temperature, a star's luminosity grows with the SQUARE of its radius (Stefan's law).

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    blackbody 黑体 hēi tǐ
    wavelength 波长 bō cháng
    temperature 温度 wēn dù
    Wien's displacement law 维恩位移定律 wéi ēn wèi yí dìng lǜ
    Stefan–Boltzmann constant 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼常量 sī tè fān - bō ěr zī màn cháng liàng
    Stefan–Boltzmann law 斯特藩-玻尔兹曼定律 sī tè fān - bō ěr zī màn dìng lǜ
    25.3

    Redshift, Hubble's law and the Big Bang

    Syllabus
    1. understand that the lines in the emission and absorption spectra from distant objects show an increase in wavelength from their known values
    2. use $\Delta\lambda / \lambda \approx \Delta f / f \approx v / c$ for the redshift of electromagnetic radiation from a source moving relative to an observer
    3. explain why redshift leads to the idea that the Universe is expanding
    4. recall and use Hubble's law $v \approx H_0 d$ and explain how this leads to the Big Bang theory (candidates will only be required to use SI units)

    Source: Cambridge International syllabus

    Cosmological redshift

    The spectral lines 谱线 of light from distant galaxies are seen at longer wavelengths than their known laboratory values — the whole spectrum is stretched towards the red. This is redshift 红移.

    Two spectra compared: for a near star the dark hydrogen absorption lines sit at their laboratory wavelengths; for a distant star the same pattern of lines is shifted towards the red (longer-wavelength) end
    The hydrogen absorption lines of a distant star are shifted to longer wavelengths — a redshift

    Reading it as a Doppler shift, the galaxy is moving away. For $v \ll c$:

    $$\frac{\Delta \lambda}{\lambda} \approx \frac{v}{c},$$

    where $\Delta\lambda = \lambda_{\text{observed}} - \lambda_{\text{emitted}}$ and $v$ is the speed of recession 退行. Example: light emitted at $4.62 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ but seen at $4.91 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ gives $\Delta\lambda = 0.29 \times 10^{-7}\ \text{m}$ and

    $$v \approx \frac{\Delta\lambda}{\lambda_{\text{em}}} c \approx 1.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}.$$

    Why redshift means an expanding Universe

    Almost every distant galaxy is redshifted (a few near ones are blueshifted 蓝移 by local motion). So galaxies are, on average, moving apart — not just from us but from each other. The Universe is expanding, with the space between galaxies stretching. More distant galaxies are redshifted more.

    A deep black field scattered with thousands of faint coloured smudges, spirals and ellipses — each one a distant galaxy, photographed by the Hubble Space Telescope
    The Hubble Ultra Deep Field — almost every point of light is a whole galaxy, most of them redshifted and receding

    Hubble's law

    The link between recession speed $v$ and distance $d$ is Hubble's law 哈勃定律:

    $$v \approx H_{0} \cdot d,$$

    where $H_{0}$ is the Hubble constant 哈勃常数 ($\approx 2.3 \times 10^{-18}\ \text{s}^{-1}$). Always use SI units. Example: a galaxy receding at $1.9 \times 10^{7}\ \text{m s}^{-1}$ is at $d = v/H_{0} \approx 8.3 \times 10^{24}\ \text{m}$.

    A graph of recession speed against distance for galaxies: the data lie on a straight line through the origin of gradient H0, showing that speed is proportional to distance
    Hubble's law: a galaxy's recession speed is proportional to its distance, $v = H_0 d$

    From Hubble's law to the Big Bang

    Hubble's law means the galaxies were once together. Running the expansion backwards, all distances shrink to zero at $t = -1/H_{0}$ — the Universe was once a tiny, hugely dense, hot point. This is the Big Bang 大爆炸. The age of the Universe (for steady expansion) is about

    $$T_{\text{age}} \approx \frac{1}{H_{0}} \approx 4.3 \times 10^{17}\ \text{s} \approx 14 \text{ billion years}.$$

    The expansion, the redshift of galaxies, the cosmic microwave background 宇宙微波背景, and the hydrogen/helium abundances are the main evidence for the Big Bang.

    Distance ladder

    Astronomers combine methods, each calibrated by the one below:

    1. parallax — for nearby stars.
    2. standard candles (Cepheids, Type Ia supernovae) — for galaxies.
    3. Hubble's law ($d = v/H_{0}$, with $v$ from redshift) — for very distant galaxies.
    The cosmic distance ladder: parallax for nearby stars calibrates standard candles for galaxies, which calibrate Hubble's law for very distant galaxies, each rung reaching further
    The distance ladder: each method is calibrated by the one below and reaches further out
    Explore

    Hubble's law

    v = H₀·d

    Recession speed is proportional to distance — the gradient is Hubble's constant.

    Vocabulary Train
    English Chinese Pinyin
    spectral lines 谱线 pǔ xiàn
    redshift 红移 hóng yí
    recession 退行 tuì xíng
    blueshifted 蓝移 lán yí
    Hubble's law 哈勃定律 hā bó dìng lǜ
    Hubble constant 哈勃常数 hā bó cháng shù
    Big Bang 大爆炸 dà bào zhà
    cosmic microwave background 宇宙微波背景 yǔ zhòu wēi bō bèi jǐng
    25.3

    Exam tips

    • $F = L/4\pi d^2$ (inverse-square): a standard candle has known luminosity $L$, so the distance follows from the measured flux $F$.
    • Wien's law ($\lambda_{max} \propto 1/T$) gives surface temperature; Stefan's law $L = 4\pi r^2 \sigma T^4$.
    • Redshift $z = \Delta\lambda/\lambda \approx v/c$; Hubble's law $v = H_0 d$ leads to the age of the universe (evidence for the Big Bang).

Log in or create account

IGCSE & A-Level